diff options
author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2024-06-02 20:26:39 +0000 |
---|---|---|
committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2024-06-02 20:26:39 +0000 |
commit | b0c666dbd315af330424f5d34739d7d4134d0c17 (patch) | |
tree | 0b0a60149691348e9cea719bb797b2c1587adfc6 /Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base | |
parent | 5634f0473d32ab71b4fbaaf0a6870737c2cc6dcb (diff) |
latex2e (2jun24)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@71408 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base')
51 files changed, 5890 insertions, 877 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx index c7e20ba52d1..4718c004b40 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ %<package>\ProvidesPackage{alltt} %<driver>\ProvidesFile{alltt.drv} %\ProvidesFile{alltt.dtx} - [2021/01/29 v2.0g defines alltt environment] + [2024/02/08 v2.0g defines alltt environment] % %<*driver> \documentclass{ltxdoc} @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ % \end{itemize} % % \textbf{NB} When you are using \textsf{OT1} encoded fonts you might -% be surprsied when you switch to italics, becuase those fonts have +% be surprised when you switch to italics, because those fonts have % a different set of glyphs: % \begin{alltt} % The glyph at the position of the $ in a slanted font: \textsl{$}. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx index 688380e3e19..f7c53f0f719 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ %<*driver> \ProvidesFile{classes.drv} %</driver> - [2023/05/17 v1.4n + [2024/02/08 v1.4n %<article|report|book> Standard LaTeX document class] %<10pt|11pt|12pt> Standard LaTeX file (size option)] % \end{macrocode} @@ -1882,7 +1882,7 @@ % \changes{v1.3a}{1995/05/17}{Use \cs{@makefnmark} in definition of % \cs{@makefntext}} % \changes{v1.3g}{1995/06/26}{Fix definition of \cs{@makefnmark} and -% \cs{@makefntext} to a) work and b) without using math} +% \cs{@makefntext} to (a) work and (b) without using math} % \begin{macrocode} \else \newcommand\maketitle{\par @@ -2002,7 +2002,7 @@ % `section'. % \item[\meta{level}] A number, denoting the depth of the section % -- e.g., chapter=1, section = 2, etc. A section number -% will be printed if and only if \meta{level} $<=$ the value +% will be printed if and only if \meta{level} $\leq$ the value % of the \Lcount{secnumdepth} counter. % \item[\meta{indent}] The indentation of the heading from the left % margin @@ -3068,7 +3068,7 @@ % list environment's parameters. The user types |\\| to end a line. % This is implemented by |\let|'ing |\\| equal |\@centercr|. % -% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{stop \cs{item} scanning for [ with +% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{stop \cs{item} scanning for [ with ^^A ] % \cs{relax}} % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{verse} @@ -3091,7 +3091,7 @@ % are set smaller than |\textwidth|. The first line of a paragraph % inside this environment is indented. % -% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{stop \cs{item} scanning for [ with +% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{stop \cs{item} scanning for [ with ^^A ] % \cs{relax}} % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{quotation} @@ -3110,7 +3110,7 @@ % The quote environment is like the quotation environment except % that paragraphs are not indented. % -% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{stop \cs{item} scanning for [ with +% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{stop \cs{item} scanning for [ with ^^A ] % \cs{relax}} % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{quote} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx index 8b48f59d6a6..946f187389f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx @@ -34,9 +34,9 @@ %\catcode`\<=14 %<+package|shortvrb>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/12/01] %<+package> -%<+package>\providecommand\DeclareRelease[3]{} -%<+package>\providecommand\DeclareCurrentRelease[2]{} -%<+package> +% Any rollback request before 2016-02-15 we try to fullfil with the 2016 version: +%<+package>\DeclareRelease{}{1994-06-01} +%<+package> {doc-2016-02-15.sty} %<+package>\DeclareRelease{v2.1g}{2016-02-15} %<+package> {doc-2016-02-15.sty} %<+package>\DeclareRelease{v2}{2021-06-01} @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ %<+package> %<+package>\ProvidesPackage{doc} %<+shortvrb>\ProvidesPackage{shortvrb} -%<+package|shortvrb> [2022/11/13 v3.0m +%<+package|shortvrb> [2024/04/26 v3.0p %<+package|shortvrb> Standard LaTeX documentation package V3 (FMi)] %\catcode`\<=12 % @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ % % %% Package `doc' to use with LaTeX 2e -%% Copyright (C) 1989-2022 Frank Mittelbach, all rights reserved. +%% Copyright (C) 1989-2023 Frank Mittelbach, all rights reserved. % % % Version: Date: Changes: @@ -143,8 +143,8 @@ % \MakeShortVerb{\|} % \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1} % -% {\catcode`\p=12 \catcode`\t=12 ^^A hack used later on to print -% \gdef\dimenvalue#1pt{$#1$pt}} ^^A a register value with a - sign +% {\catcode`\p=12 \catcode`\t=12 ^^A hack used later on to print a +% \gdef\dimenvalue#1pt{$#1$pt}} ^^A register value with a - sign % % \newcommand{\DOC}{\texttt{doc}\xspace} % @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ %\RenewDocElement[macrolike = true , % toplevel = false, % idxtype = , -% idxgroup = LaTeX comands\actualchar\LaTeX{} commands , +% idxgroup = LaTeX commands\actualchar\LaTeX{} commands , % printtype = % ]{Macro}{macro} % @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ % \changes{v1.9t}{1995/05/11}{Use \cs{GetFileInfo}} % \GetFileInfo{doc.sty} % -% \CheckSum{0} ^^A % keep the checksum in this file but not now :-) +% \CheckSum{0} % % \title{The \DOC{} and \texttt{shortvrb} Packages\thanks % {This file has version number \fileversion{} dated \filedate{}.}} @@ -595,7 +595,16 @@ % class file (like \texttt{ltugboat.cls}) use the |\DocstyleParms| % command described below. Starting with release 2.0a it can now % be changed directly as long as the redefinition happens before -% the |\begin{document}|. +% the |\begin{document}| (if you change it later you might see strange +% typesetting effects if you are unlucky). +% +% |\MacroFont| does not alter the font of +% |\verb| or |\verb*| because it is often used to make the font size of +% the code displays smaller, which would look odd if used within a +% paragraph. If you decide to use a different font family and want to +% use the same family with +% |\verb| you need to alter the font setup for |\ttfamily| in addition +% to |\MacroFont|. % % \DescribeEnv{environment} % For documenting the definition of environments one can use the @@ -695,6 +704,12 @@ % |\NewDocElement{Env}{environment}| % though that's not quite what has been done, as we will see later. % +% \DescribeInterfaceMacro{\ProvideDocElement} +% This declaration does nothing when the doc element is already +% declared, otherwise it works like \cs{NewDocElement}. It can be +% useful if you have many documentation files that you may want to +% process individually as well as together. +% % \DescribeOption[noprint]{macrolike} % \DescribeOption[noprint]{envlike} % \DescribeOption[noprint]{toplevel} @@ -1367,7 +1382,7 @@ %\RenewDocElement[macrolike = true , % toplevel = false, % idxtype = , -% idxgroup = LaTeX comands\actualchar\LaTeX{} commands , +% idxgroup = LaTeX commands\actualchar\LaTeX{} commands , % printtype = % ]{Macro}{macro} %\end{verbatim} @@ -1515,7 +1530,7 @@ % % Thirty years is a long time in the life of computer programs, so % there are a good number of interfaces within \DOC that are really -% only of historical interest (or when processing equally old sources. +% only of historical interest (or when processing equally old sources). % We list them here, but in general we suggest that for new % documentation they should not be used. % @@ -2108,9 +2123,12 @@ % that is, they must be given |\catcode| $12$. % \changes{v1.8b}{1993/09/21}{Changed to conform to new LaTeX verbatim, % which handles more ligatures.} +% \changes{v3.0o}{2023/12/30}{Use \cs{@noligs} from the \LaTeX\ +% kernel, so that the \texttt{upquote} package can +% add its patch (gh/1230)} % \begin{macrocode} \obeylines - \let\do\do@noligs \verbatim@nolig@list + \@noligs \let\do\@makeother \dospecials % \end{macrocode} % \changes{v1.5t}{1989/11/07}{Common code added.} @@ -2183,7 +2201,7 @@ % \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/13}{Added \cs{reset@font} for NFSS.} % \changes{v1.8c}{1993/10/25}{NFSS standard} % \changes{v1.9t}{1995/05/26}{Removed \cs{math@fontsfalse} (different -% math setup /pr1622} +% math setup /pr1622)} % \begin{macrocode} \@ifundefined{MacroFont}{% \if@compatibility @@ -2220,7 +2238,7 @@ % \changes{v1.7m}{1992/10/11}{Use sltt as default.} % \changes{v1.8c}{1993/10/25}{NFSS standard} % \changes{v1.9t}{1995/05/26}{Removed \cs{math@fontsfalse} (different -% math setup /pr1622} +% math setup /pr1622)} % Although most of the macro code is set in |\MacroFont| we want to be % able to switch to indicate module code set in |\AltMacroFont|. % |\macro@font| keeps track of which one we're using. We can't do the @@ -2681,7 +2699,7 @@ % \end{macrocode} % % \changes{v2.1j}{2019/11/03}{Kernel now sets up \cs{verbvisiblespace} (gh/205)} -% \changes{v2.1k}{2019/11/10}{Put the definition into the right command :-( (gh/205)} +% \changes{v2.1k}{2019/11/10}{Put the definition into the right command (gh/205)} % \begin{macrocode} \@setupverbvisiblespace \MacroFont \@vobeyspaces \@sxverbatim} @@ -2895,32 +2913,32 @@ % following tasks: % \begin{itemize} % \parindent4em -% \item[1)] +% \item[(1)] % |\catcode| all characters used in macro names to -% 11 (i.e.\ `letter'). -% \item[2)] +% 11 (i.e., `letter'). +% \item[(2)] % |\catcode| the `|\|' character to 13 -% (i.e.\ `active'). -% \item[3a)] +% (i.e., `active'). +% \item[(3a)] % |\let| the `|\|' equal |\scan@macro| -% (i.e.\ start the macro scanning mechanism) if there is -% no special escape character (i.e.\ the +% (i.e., start the macro scanning mechanism) if there is +% no special escape character (i.e., the % |\special@escape@char| is `|\|'). -% \item[3b)] +% \item[(3b)] % Otherwise |\let| it equal |\bslash|, i.e.\ % produce a printable |\|. -% \item[4)] +% \item[(4)] % Make the \meta{special escape character} active. -% \item[5)] +% \item[(5)] % |\let| the active version of the special escape % character -% (i.e.\ the expansion of |\active@escape@char|) equal +% (i.e., the expansion of |\active@escape@char|) equal % |\scan@macro|. % \end{itemize} % The reader might ask why we bother to |\catcode| the % `|\|' first to 12 (at the end of |\macro@code|) then % re-|\catcode| it to 13 in order to produce a $|\|_{12}$ -% in case 3b) above. This is done because we have to ensure that +% in case (3b) above. This is done because we have to ensure that % `|\|' has |\catcode| 13 within the \env{macrocode} % environment. Otherwise the delimiter for the argument of % |\xmacro@code| would not be found (parameter matching @@ -2930,14 +2948,14 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \begingroup \catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\\=\active % \end{macrocode} -% We carry out tasks 2) and 3b) first. +% We carry out tasks (2) and (3b) first. % \SpecialEscapechar\| % \begin{macrocode} |gdef|init@crossref{|catcode`|\|active |let\|bslash % \end{macrocode} % Because of the popularity of the `|@|' character as a % `letter' in macros, we normally have to change its -% |\catcode| here, and thus fulfill task 1). But the macro +% |\catcode| here, and thus fulfill task (1). But the macro % designer might use other characters as private letters as well, % so we use a macro to do the |\catcode| switching. % \SpecialEscapechar\| @@ -2945,8 +2963,8 @@ |MakePrivateLetters % \end{macrocode} % Now we |\catcode| the special escape character to 13 and -% |\let| it equal |\scan@macro|, i.e.\ fulfill tasks 4) -% and 5). Note the use of |\expandafter| to insert the chosen +% |\let| it equal |\scan@macro|, i.e., fulfill tasks (4) +% and (5). Note the use of |\expandafter| to insert the chosen % escape character saved in |\special@escape@char| and % |\active@escape@char|. % \SpecialEscapechar\| @@ -2955,7 +2973,7 @@ |expandafter|let|active@escape@char|scan@macro} |endgroup % \end{macrocode} -% If there is no special escape character, i.e.\ if +% If there is no special escape character, i.e., if % |\SpecialEscapechar| is |\\|, the second last line will % overwrite the previous definition of $|\|_{13}$. In this % way all tasks are fulfilled. @@ -3109,9 +3127,9 @@ % done by the |\ifnot@excluded| macro which assumes that the % macro name is saved in |\macro@namepart|. The character % mustn't be stored with a special category code or exclusion from -% the index won't work, so we we use \cs{string} to normalize it -% the same way it is done in \cs{DoNotIndex}, i.e. everything ends up catcode 12 -% except for the space character. +% the index won't work, so we use \cs{string} to normalize it +% the same way it is done in \cs{DoNotIndex}, i.e. everything ends up +% catcode 12 except for the space character. % \changes{v2.0e}{1998/12/28}{Correctly use the case-changing trick.} % \changes{v3.0l}{2022/11/03}{No longer using the case-changing trick.} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3254,7 +3272,7 @@ % unnecessarily index within that part of the code. As the sequence % is local it will revert this setting at the end of the % environment so that the command is indexed elsewhere (unless it -% is generally disabled from indexing. +% is generally disabled from indexing). % % \DescribeMacro\g__doc_idxtype_prop % Global property list that holds for all commands that are special @@ -3282,7 +3300,7 @@ % \DescribeInterfaceMacro\RecordIndexType % This command takes two arguments: a command (with escape char) % and its type (i.e., first mandatory -% argument of a |\NewDocElement| declaration. If |#1| should not be +% argument of a |\NewDocElement| declaration). If |#1| should not be % included from the index, then the data is used to record that % this command is of this type. The information is then used to % generate appropriate index entries. Obviously, index entries @@ -3481,7 +3499,7 @@ % \begin{macro}{\__doc_idxtype_put:nn} % This internal command takes two arguments: a command name as % string (no backslash) and its type (i.e., first mandatory -% argument of a |\NewDocElement| declaration. If |#1| is not in +% argument of a |\NewDocElement| declaration). If |#1| is not in % |\l__doc_donotindex_seq| it will add this data to the property % list |\g__doc_idxtype_prop| using |#1| as key and |#2| as its % value. If the key already exist its value will be overwritten. If @@ -3884,7 +3902,8 @@ % \begin{imacro}{\RightBraceIndex} % \changes{v1.5s}{1989/11/05}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)} These % two macros fix the problems with \prg{makeindex}. Note the -% `hack' with |\iffalse}\fi| to satisfy both \TeX{} and the +% `hack' with \iffalse{-to get matching braces\fi |\iffalse}\fi| +% to satisfy both \TeX{} and the % \prg{makeindex} program. When this is written to the % \texttt{.idx} file \TeX{} will see both braces (so we get a % balanced text). \prg{makeindex} will also see balanced braces @@ -5539,7 +5558,7 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \long\def\@doc@env#1#2#3{ % \end{macrocode} -% The |\endgroup| here closes the scanning of names (using special catcodes. +% The |\endgroup| here closes the scanning of names (using special catcodes). % \begin{macrocode} \endgroup \clist_map_inline:nn {#3} { \@doc@env@{#1}{#2}{##1} } @@ -5565,8 +5584,8 @@ % they are technically part of the generated API, only not meant for public % use. % -% \fmi{above docu is no longer right (but code needs further changes -% anyway} +% \fmi{above docu is no longer right (but code probably needs further changes +% anyway)} % % |#1| is either \texttt{TT} (for true = macrolike) or \texttt{TF}. % If true then we drop the first char from |\saved@macroname| and @@ -5580,7 +5599,7 @@ % If the \DOC element described is macrolike but not a normal % ``macro'' then its type should be recorded and this is the places % where this happens. For macros (which should make up the bulk of -% these items we don't do this and for anything else that looks +% these items) we don't do this and for anything else that looks % from an indexing perspective like a macro we don't do that either % to keep the list of exceptions small. That would be the case if % the indexing command |\Code|\meta{doc-element}|Index| is @@ -5635,7 +5654,7 @@ \fi % \end{macrocode} % Suppress further |\index| entries when we are within a -% \texttt{macrolike} environment. (There is no point doing that for +% \texttt{macrolike} environment. There is no point doing that for % non-\texttt{macrolike} environments are index entries are only % generated for items starting with a backslash anyway. % \fmi{fix} @@ -5940,6 +5959,16 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % +% \begin{macro}{\doc@ignoredinfo} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\doc@ignoredinfo#1#2{% + \PackageInfo{doc}{Doc element '#1/#2' declaration + ignored}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% % % \begin{imacro}{\NewDocElement} % \oarg{options}\marg{name}\marg{envname} @@ -5963,6 +5992,30 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{imacro} % +% \begin{imacro}{\ProvideDocElement} +% \oarg{options}\marg{name}\marg{envname} +% This does nothing unless the doc element could be declared with +% \cs{NewDocElement}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\ProvideDocElement[3][]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{Print#2Name}% + {\@ifundefined{PrintDescribe#2}% + {\@ifundefined{#3}% + {\@ifundefined{end#3}% + {\@NewDocElement{#1}}% + \doc@ignoredinfo + }\doc@ignoredinfo + }\doc@ignoredinfo + }\doc@ignoredinfo + {#2}{#3}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{imacro} +% +% % \begin{imacro}{\RenewDocElement} % \oarg{options}\marg{name}\marg{envname} % @@ -6098,7 +6151,7 @@ % \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{SpecialMainIndex} +% \begin{macro}{\SpecialMainIndex} % % In \DOC v2 we had \cs{SpecialMainIndex} and % \cs{SpecialMainEnvIndex} but now with additional \DOC elements we @@ -6110,7 +6163,7 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{SpecialUsageIndex} +% \begin{macro}{\SpecialUsageIndex} % \DOC v2 also had \cs{SpecialUsageIndex} which is now called % \cs{SpecialMacroIndex} generating the ``usage'' index entry for % a macro. Again we provide that as an alias via |\def|. @@ -6206,86 +6259,6 @@ %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \section{Code no longer used} -% -% \begin{imacro}{\verb} -% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/27}{Now warns about newlines (from -% newdoc with `@noligs added).} -% \changes{v1.8b}{1993/09/21}{Changed to conform to new LaTeX \cs{verb}} -% We re-define |\verb| to check for newlines in its argument since a -% missing delimiter is difficult to detect in \DOC{} source. -% The code is the same as in \texttt{latex.tex} of September 19, 1993. -% Perhaps there should be a font-changing -% hook rather than just using |\ttfamily|, but if so it probably should be -% different from |\MacroFont| since that normally includes |\small| -% and would look wrong inline. -% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/28}{Added math mode check (from verbatim.sty)} -% \begin{macrocode} -%\def\verb{\relax\ifmmode\hbox\else\leavevmode\null\fi -% \bgroup \let\do\do@noligs \verbatim@nolig@list -% \ttfamily \verb@eol@error \let\do\@makeother \dospecials -% \@ifstar{\@sverb}{\@vobeyspaces \frenchspacing \@sverb}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{imacro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\verb@balance@group} -% \begin{macro}{\verb@egroup} -% \begin{macro}{\verb@eol@error} -% \changes{v1.8b}{1993/09/21}{Renamed \cs{verb@err} to -% \cs{verb@eol@error}, as in new LaTeX verbatim.} -% \begin{macrocode} -%\let\verb@balance@group\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%\def\verb@egroup{\global\let\verb@balance@group\@empty\egroup} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%\begingroup -% \obeylines% -% \gdef\verb@eol@error{\obeylines% -% \def^^M{\verb@egroup\@latex@error{% -% \noexpand\verb command ended by end of line}\@ehc}}% -%\endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@sverb} -% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/27}{Added for \cs{verb} change.} -% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/28}{Now same as in verbatim.sty.} -% \changes{v1.8b}{1993/09/21}{Changed to conform to new LaTeX verbatim, -% which has better error trapping.} -% See \cite{art:verbatim} for commentary. -% \changes{v2.1j}{2019/11/03}{Use the kernel definition, no change needed (gh/205)} -% \begin{macrocode} -%\def\@sverb#1{% -% \catcode`#1\active \lccode`\~`#1% -% \gdef\verb@balance@group{\verb@egroup -% \@latex@error{Illegal use of \noexpand\verb command}\@ehc}% -% \aftergroup\verb@balance@group -% \lowercase{\let~\verb@egroup}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@nolig@list} -% \begin{macro}{\do@noligs} -% These macros replace the old |\@noligs| mechanism by an -% extensible version to allow more ligatures to be added. -% \begin{macrocode} -%\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\<\do\>\do\,\do\'\do\-} -%\def\do@noligs#1{% -% \catcode`#1\active -% \begingroup -% \lccode`\~`#1\relax -% \lowercase{\endgroup\def~{\leavevmode\kern\z@\char`#1}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} - ^^A Needed for emacs ^^A diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx index 9677fdad61f..d5366b3fddf 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ \def\filename{docstrip.dtx} \def\fileversion{v2.6b} \def\filedate{2022-09-03} -\def\docdate {2023-10-10} +\def\docdate {2024-02-08} %% % %\iffalse @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ % \DescribeMacro{\endbatchfile} % All batch files should end with this command. Any lines after this % in the file are ignored. In old files that start -% |\def\batchfile{|\ldots\ this command is optional, but is a good +% |\def\batchfile{|\ldots\ \iffalse}\fi this command is optional, but is a good % idea anyway. If this command is omitted from a batchfile then % normally \TeX\ will go to its interactive |*| prompt, so you may % stop \ds{} by typing |\endbatchfile| to this prompt. @@ -757,7 +757,7 @@ % \meta{Primary}]*\\ % \meta{Primary} & $::=$ & % \meta{Terminal} $|$ \texttt{!}\meta{Primary} -% $|$ \texttt{(}\meta{Expression}\texttt{)}\\ +% $|$ \texttt(\meta{Expression}\texttt)\\ % \end{tabular} % % The \texttt{|} stands for disjunction, the \texttt{\&} stands for @@ -1712,7 +1712,7 @@ Z % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{\quote@name} -% \changes{v2.5h}{2020/04/18}{Macro added gfh/221)} +% \changes{v2.5h}{2020/04/18}{Macro added (gh/221)} % A macro copied from \texttt{ltfiles.dtx} in order to be able to % allow spaces in filenames. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1994,7 +1994,7 @@ Z % \meta{Primary} & $::=$ & % \meta{Terminal} $|$ \texttt{!}\meta{Primary} % $|$ -% \texttt{(}\meta{Expression}\texttt{)}\\ +% \texttt(\meta{Expression}\texttt)\\ % \end{tabular} % % The \texttt{|} stands for disjunction, the \texttt{\&} stands for @@ -2023,7 +2023,7 @@ Z % \begin{eqnarray*} % \tau(\meta{Terminal})&=&"\t@<Terminal>,#1,<Terminal>,\qStop"\\ % \tau(!\meta{Primary})&=&"\if1"\,\tau(\meta{Primary})\,"0\else1\fi"\\ -% \tau(\mbox{\texttt{(}\meta{Expression}\texttt{)}}) +% \tau(\mbox{\texttt(\meta{Expression}\texttt)}) % &=&\tau(\meta{Expression})\\ % \tau(\mbox{\meta{Primary}\texttt{\&}\meta{Secondary}}) % &=&"\if0"\,\tau(\meta{Primary})\,"0\else" @@ -4473,7 +4473,7 @@ for copying and modification in the file \inFileName. % {Macro added (DPC)} % Process the batch file, and then terminate cleanly. % This may be set to |\relax| for `new style' batch files that -% do not start with |\def\batchfile{|\ldots +% do not start with |\def\batchfile{|\ldots \iffalse}\fi % \begin{macrocode} \def\process@first@batchfile{% \processbatchFile diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx index 82b09709af1..281add29efc 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx @@ -27,7 +27,8 @@ % % \fi % \iffalse -%%% From File: fontdef.dtx +%%% From File: fontdef.dtx +%<*!latexrelease> %<*dtx> \ProvidesFile{fontdef.dtx} %</dtx> @@ -38,17 +39,24 @@ %<+cfgprel>\ProvidesFile{preload.cfg} %<driver, >\ProvidesFile{fontdef.drv} % \fi -% \ProvidesFile{fontdef.dtx} -%<-latexrelease> [2021/01/15 v3.0i LaTeX Kernel -% \iftrue (\else -%<text, >(Text -%<math, >(Math -%<+cfgtext>(Uncustomized text -%<+cfgmath>(Uncustomized math -%<+cfgprel>(Uncustomized preload +% \ProvidesFile{fontdef.dtx} + [2024/02/09 v3.0i LaTeX Kernel +% \iffalse +%<text, > (Text font setup) +%<math, > (Math font setup) +%<+cfgtext> (Uncustomized text font setup) +%<+cfgmath> (Uncustomized math font setup) +%<+cfgprel> (Uncustomized preload font setup) +%<*dtx> % \fi -%<-latexrelease> font setup)] -% +(font setup) +%\iffalse +%</dtx> +%\fi +] +% \iffalse +%</!latexrelease> +%\fi % %\iffalse This is a META comment % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins index 2e14ee0e62a..e20ff094380 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins @@ -170,6 +170,7 @@ the system are in the document `cfgguide.tex'. \from{lthooks.dtx}{2ekernel} % L3 layer module \from{ltcmdhooks.dtx}{2ekernel} % L3 layer module \from{ltsockets.dtx}{2ekernel} % L3 layer module + \from{lttemplates.dtx}{2ekernel} % L3 layer module \from{ltalloc.dtx}{2ekernel} \from{ltcntrl.dtx}{2ekernel} \from{lterror.dtx}{2ekernel} @@ -206,11 +207,12 @@ the system are in the document `cfgguide.tex'. \from{ltbibl.dtx}{2ekernel} \from{ltmarks.dtx}{trace,2ekernel} % L3 layer module \from{ltpage.dtx}{2ekernel} - \from{ltclass.dtx}{2ekernel,tracerollback} + \from{ltclass.dtx}{2ekernel,tracerollback} \from{ltkeys.dtx}{2ekernel} % L3 layer module \from{ltfilehook.dtx}{2ekernel} % L3 layer module \from{ltshipout.dtx}{2ekernel} % L3 layer module \from{ltoutput.dtx}{2ekernel} + \from{lttagging.dtx}{2ekernel} \from{ltfinal.dtx}{2ekernel}} \file{tracefnt.sty}{% \from{ltfsstrc.dtx}{package,trace}} @@ -228,6 +230,8 @@ the system are in the document `cfgguide.tex'. \from{lttextcomp.dtx}{TS1sty}} \file{textcomp-2018-08-11.sty}{% \from{lttextcomp.dtx}{TS1oldsty}} + \file{checkencodingsubset.tex}{% + \from{lttextcomp.dtx}{TS1check}} } \generateFile{oldlfont.sty}{t}{% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx index ef7d8ab3987..0bbe3612115 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ %% %% File `ifthen.dtx'. %% Copyright (C) 1991 by Leslie Lamport -%% Copyright (C) 1994-2001 LaTeX project, David Carlisle +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2024 LaTeX project, David Carlisle %% all rights reserved. %% % @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ %<driver>\ProvidesFile{ifthen.drv} % \fi % \ProvidesFile{ifthen.dtx} - [2022/04/13 v1.1d Standard LaTeX ifthen package (DPC)] + [2024/03/16 v1.1e Standard LaTeX ifthen package (DPC)] % % \iffalse %<*driver> @@ -273,15 +273,35 @@ \ifx##1\relax\z@\else\expandafter##2##1\fi}}} % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup +\lccode`\~`\> % +\catcode`\+\active +\lccode`\+`\< % +\catcode`\!\active +\lccode`\!`\= % +\lowercase{\endgroup +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\TE@repl@active{% + \TE@repl~>% + \TE@repl+<% + \TE@repl!=% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} \long\def\ifthenelse#1{% % \end{macrocode} % \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/14}{Use \cs{TE@repl}} +% \changes{v1.1e}{2024/03/16}{replace active \cs{ifnum} syntax} % \begin{macrocode} \toks@{#1}% \TE@repl\or\TE@or \TE@repl\and\TE@and \TE@repl\not\TE@neg % \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} + \TE@repl@active +% \end{macrocode} % % \changes{v1.1c}{2001/05/25}{Added \cs{AND}, \cs{OR} and \cs{NOT} as % boolean operators as alternative to the lower case versions @@ -353,7 +373,10 @@ \expandafter\@firstoftwo \else \expandafter\@secondoftwo - \fi} + \fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} +} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx index 5858743afd8..7ab9713d8e9 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ % Originally this command was only to be used in vertical mode (with % the idea that it should be only within a document when % using text from several documents to build up a composite work such -% as a volume of journal articles. However, usages in certain +% as a volume of journal articles). However, usages in certain % languages suggested that it might be preferable to allow changing % the input encoding at any time, which is what is possible now % (though that is quite computing resource intensive). @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ %<cp1252&!ansinew> \ProvidesFile{cp1252.def} %<cp1250> \ProvidesFile{cp1250.def} %<cp1257> \ProvidesFile{cp1257.def} - [2021/02/14 v1.3d Input encoding file] + [2024/02/08 v1.3d Input encoding file] %<cp850>%% %<cp850>%% If you need a Euro symbol, try cp858 instead. %<cp850>%% @@ -2204,7 +2204,7 @@ % \section{The Next encoding} % % This input encoding is based on work by Stefan Ried -% (\texttt{stef@\linebreak[0]theo-phys.uni-essen.de} and Holger Uhr +% (\texttt{stef@\linebreak[0]theo-phys.uni-essen.de}) and Holger Uhr % (\texttt{huhr@\linebreak[0]uni-paderborn.de}). % % Further extended by diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.ins index 8ae19b318d3..89c3b0fc3a7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.ins +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexrelease.ins @@ -97,6 +97,7 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. \from{lthooks.dtx} {latexrelease}% L3 layer module \from{ltcmdhooks.dtx} {latexrelease}% L3 layer module \from{ltsockets.dtx} {latexrelease}% L3 layer module + \from{lttemplates.dtx} {latexrelease}% L3 layer module \from{ltalloc.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty \from{ltcntrl.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty \from{lterror.dtx} {latexrelease}% empty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx index 7c5a7c01397..7e6c787ab89 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltboxes.dtx} - [2023/10/26 v1.4e LaTeX Kernel (Box Commands)] + [2024/04/22 v1.4f LaTeX Kernel (Box Commands)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltboxes.dtx} @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ % Note that in this picture mode version of |\makebox| a [b] aligns on % the \emph{bottom} of the text as documented. If you want to align on % the \emph{baseline} use -% |\makebox( , )[b]{\raisebox{0pt}[\height][0pt]{xyz}}}| +% |\makebox( , )[b]{\raisebox{0pt}[\height][0pt]{xyz}}| % or |\makebox( , )[b]{\smash{xyz}}| % % \DescribeMacro\mbox @@ -235,7 +235,8 @@ % \begin{macro}{\makebox} % \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03} % {modified} -% |\makebox| User level command just looks for optional |[| or |(|. +% |\makebox| User level command just looks for optional +% |[| or |(|. \iffalse)]\fi % \changes{v1.1h}{2015/01/08}{Make Robust (latexrelease)} % \begin{macrocode} %</2ekernel> @@ -1010,7 +1011,7 @@ % set globally to false when they are definitely true. % % If anyone is unhappy with this argument then both flags should be -% treated as in |\set@nobreak|; otherwise this command will be +% treated as in |\@setnobreak|; otherwise this command will be % redundant. % \changes{v1.1a}{1996/10/24}{Added local settings of flags: dangerous!!} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1486,9 +1487,40 @@ % % The |\nobreak| was added (1995/10/31) to allow hyphenation of the % final word of the paragraph. +% +% In 2024 we changed the macro to account for vertical mode. In +% that case we use a strut produced with \cs{hrule} to avoid +% starting a new paragraph (resulting in spurious extra line) and +% also account for the \cs{prevdepth} of the previous line. +% \changes{v1.4f}{2024/04/18} +% {Use a \cs{hrule} strut not a \cs{vrule} if already in +% vertical mode (bug seen first with footmisc/14)} % \begin{macrocode} +%</2ekernel> +%<*2ekernel|latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2024/06/01}% +%<latexrelease> {\@finalstrut}{final strut correction}% \def\@finalstrut#1{% - \unskip\ifhmode\nobreak\fi\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth\dp#1} + \unskip + \ifhmode \nobreak \vrule + \else + \ifdim \prevdepth=-\@m\p@ + \else + \vskip-\prevdepth + \fi + \hrule + \fi + \@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth\dp#1} +%</2ekernel|latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}% +%<latexrelease> {\@finalstrut}{final strut correction}% +%<latexrelease>\def\@finalstrut#1{% +%<latexrelease> \unskip\ifhmode\nobreak\fi +%<latexrelease> \vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth\dp#1} +%<latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%<*2ekernel> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx index 139eb7a1a72..35bbb8a55a4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltclass.dtx} - [2023/04/14 v1.5h LaTeX Kernel (Class & Package Interface)] + [2024/04/10 v1.5k LaTeX Kernel (Class & Package Interface)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltclass.dtx} @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ % package files.) % % |\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}|^^A -% |{|\meta{pkg-name}|}|\\ +% |{|\meta{pkg-name}|}}|\\ % Handle the current option by passing it on to the package % \meta{pkg-name}, which will presumably be loaded via % |\RequirePackage| later in the file. This is useful for building @@ -1075,19 +1075,20 @@ % \begin{macrocode} %</2ekernel> %<*2ekernel|latexrelease> -%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/11/15}% -%<latexrelease> {\IfPackageLoadedtTF}{Test package loading}% +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2024/06/01}% +%<latexrelease> {\IfPackageLoadedTF}{Test package loading}% \let \IfPackageLoadedTF \@ifpackageloaded \let \IfClassLoadedTF \@ifclassloaded \let \IfPackageLoadedWithOptionsTF \@ifpackagewith \let \IfClassLoadedWithOptionsTF \@ifclasswith % \end{macrocode} -% For rollback pretend it was available since the beginning of dawn. +% For rollback/rollforward pretend everything was available since +% the beginning of dawn. % \begin{macrocode} %</2ekernel|latexrelease> %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease %<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}% -%<latexrelease> {\IfPackageLoadedtTF}{Test package loading}% +%<latexrelease> {\IfPackageLoadedTF}{Test package loading}% %<latexrelease> %<latexrelease>\let \IfPackageLoadedTF \@ifpackageloaded %<latexrelease>\let \IfClassLoadedTF \@ifclassloaded @@ -1102,6 +1103,99 @@ % % % +% \begin{macro}{ +% \IfPackageLoadedT,\IfPackageLoadedF, +% \IfPackageAtLeastT,\IfPackageAtLeastF, +% \IfClassAtLeastT,\IfClassAtLeastF, +% \IfFileAtLeastT,\IfFileAtLeastF, +% \IfFormatAtLeastT,\IfFormatAtLeastF, +% \IfPackageLoadedWithOptionsT,\IfPackageLoadedWithOptionsF, +% \IfClassLoadedT,\IfClassLoadedF, +% \IfClassLoadedWithOptionsF,\IfClassLoadedWithOptionTF +% } +% A few more conditionals for convenience +% \changes{v1.5k}{2024/04/10}{Provide T and F conditionals not just TF +% (gh/1262)} +% \begin{macrocode} +%</2ekernel> +%<*2ekernel|latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2024/06/01}% +%<latexrelease> {\IfPackageLoadedT}{More conditionals}% +\def\IfPackageLoadedT #1#2{\IfPackageLoadedTF{#1}{#2}{}} +\def\IfPackageLoadedF #1{\IfPackageLoadedTF{#1}{}} +\def\IfClassLoadedT #1#2{\IfClassLoadedTF{#1}{#2}{}} +\def\IfClassLoadedF #1{\IfClassLoadedTF{#1}{}} +\def\IfPackageAtLeastT#1#2#3{\IfPackageAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{#3}{}} +\def\IfPackageAtLeastF #1#2{\IfPackageAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{}} +\def\IfClassAtLeastT #1#2#3{\IfClassAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{#3}{}} +\def\IfClassAtLeastF #1#2{\IfClassAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{}} +\def\IfFileAtLeastT #1#2#3{\IfFileAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{#3}{}} +\def\IfFileAtLeastF #1#2{\IfFileAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{}} +\def\IfFormatAtLeastT #1#2{\IfFormatAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{}} +\def\IfFormatAtLeastF #1{\IfFormatAtLeastTF{#1}{}} +\def\IfPackageLoadedWithOptionsT #1#2#3{\IfPackageLoadedWithOptionsTF{#1}{#2}{#3}{}} +\def\IfPackageLoadedWithOptionsF #1#2{\IfPackageLoadedWithOptionsTF{#1}{#2}{}} +\def\IfClassLoadedWithOptionsT #1#2#3{\IfClassLoadedWithOptionsTF{#1}{#2}{#3}{}} +\def\IfClassLoadedWithOptionsF #1#2{\IfClassLoadedWithOptionsTF{#1}{#2}{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\IfFileLoadedTF,\IfFileLoadedT,\IfFileLoadedF} +% These three commands haven't been there at all in the past. +% \changes{v1.5k}{2024/04/10}{Provide \cs{IfFileLoadedTF} and variants +% (gh/1222)} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\IfFileLoadedTF#1{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@#1\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\@secondoftwo + \else + \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \fi} +\def\IfFileLoadedT#1#2{\IfFileLoadedTF{#1}{#2}{}} +\def\IfFileLoadedF #1{\IfFileLoadedTF{#1}{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% For rollback/rollforward pretend everything was available since +% the beginning of dawn. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</2ekernel|latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}% +%<latexrelease> {\IfPackageLoadedT}{More conditionals}% +%<latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\def\IfPackageLoadedT #1#2{\IfPackageLoadedTF{#1}{#2}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfPackageLoadedF #1{\IfPackageLoadedTF{#1}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfClassLoadedT #1#2{\IfClassLoadedTF{#1}{#2}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfClassLoadedF #1{\IfClassLoadedTF{#1}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfPackageAtLeastT#1#2#3{\IfPackageAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{#3}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfPackageAtLeastF #1#2{\IfPackageAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfClassAtLeastT #1#2#3{\IfClassAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{#3}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfClassAtLeastF #1#2{\IfClassAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfFileAtLeastT #1#2#3{\IfFileAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{#3}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfFileAtLeastF #1#2{\IfFileAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfFormatAtLeastT #1#2{\IfFormatAtLeastTF{#1}{#2}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfFormatAtLeastF #1{\IfFormatAtLeastTF{#1}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfPackageLoadedWithOptionsT #1#2#3{\IfPackageLoadedWithOptionsTF{#1}{#2}{#3}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfPackageLoadedWithOptionsF #1#2{\IfPackageLoadedWithOptionsTF{#1}{#2}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfClassLoadedWithOptionsT #1#2#3{\IfClassLoadedWithOptionsTF{#1}{#2}{#3}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfClassLoadedWithOptionsF #1#2{\IfClassLoadedWithOptionsTF{#1}{#2}{}} +%<latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\def\IfFileLoadedTF#1{% +%<latexrelease> \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@#1\endcsname\relax +%<latexrelease> \expandafter\@secondoftwo +%<latexrelease> \else +%<latexrelease> \expandafter\@firstoftwo +%<latexrelease> \fi} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfFileLoadedT#1#2{\IfFileLoadedTF{#1}{#2}{}} +%<latexrelease>\def\IfFileLoadedF #1{\IfFileLoadedTF{#1}{}} +%<latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%<*2ekernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% % \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage} % Checks that the current filename is correct, and defines % |\ver@filename|. @@ -1327,11 +1421,11 @@ % \changes{v1.4c}{2021/06/06} % {apply \cs{expandafter} to raw options for gh/580} % \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{@raw@opt@#3.#1}% - {\expandafter\gdef\csname @raw@opt@#3.#1\expandafter\endcsname - \expandafter{#2}}% - {\expandafter\g@addto@macro\csname @raw@opt@#3.#1\expandafter\endcsname - \expandafter{\expandafter,#2}}% + \@ifundefined{@raw@opt@#3.#1}% + {\expandafter\gdef\csname @raw@opt@#3.#1\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter{#2}}% + {\expandafter\g@addto@macro\csname @raw@opt@#3.#1\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter{\expandafter,#2}}% } %</2ekernel|latexrelease> %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease @@ -1950,12 +2044,34 @@ % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\@fileswithoptions} +% \changes{v1.5i}{2024/01/30}{Test group level} % The common part of |\documentclass| and |\usepackage|. % \begin{macrocode} +%</2ekernel> +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2024/06/01}% +%<latexrelease> {\@fileswithoptions}{Check Group}% +%<*2ekernel|latexrelease> \def\@fileswithoptions#1{% + \ifnum\currentgrouplevel>\z@ + \@latex@error + {Loading a class or package in a group}% + {Classes and packages should only be loaded at the top level}% + \fi \@ifnextchar[%] {\@fileswith@ptions#1}% {\@fileswith@ptions#1[]}} +%</2ekernel|latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}% +%<latexrelease> {\@fileswithoptions}{Check Group}% +%<latexrelease>\def\@fileswithoptions#1{% +%<latexrelease> \@ifnextchar[%] +%<latexrelease> {\@fileswith@ptions#1}% +%<latexrelease> {\@fileswith@ptions#1[]}} +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%<*2ekernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macrocode} \@onlypreamble\@fileswithoptions % \end{macrocode} % @@ -2221,9 +2337,17 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \changes{v1.5d}{2022/10/10}{Use \cs{protected@edef}.} % \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\protected@edef\csname opt@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname + \expandafter\protected@edef + \csname opt@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname {\zap@space#2 \@empty}% - \@namedef{@raw@opt@\@currname.\@currext}{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{v1.5j}{2024/03/22} +% {Apply one-step expansion to raw option list, +% to be consistent with change for gh/580 (gh/1298).} +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\def + \csname @raw@opt@\@currname.\@currext\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter{#2}% \@nameuse{opt@handler@\@currname.\@currext}% }% }% @@ -2624,8 +2748,8 @@ % % Allow code to be saved to be executed at specific later times. % -% Save things in macros, I considered using toks registers, (and -% |\addto@hook| from the NFSS code, that would require stacking the +% Here we save things in macros. I considered using toks registers (and +% |\addto@hook| from the NFSS code), but that would require stacking the % contents in the case of required packages, so just generate a new % macro for each package. % \begin{macro}{\@begindocumenthook} @@ -2997,7 +3121,7 @@ \let\do\@makeother\dospecials% % \end{macrocode} % If there are active characters in the upper half (e.g., from -% \texttt{inputenc} there would be confusion so we render everything +% \texttt{inputenc}) there would be confusion so we render everything % harmless. % \changes{v1.2f}{2018/03/27} % {Use full file name for old release} @@ -3585,7 +3709,7 @@ % and therefore we can now test its value. If the value is zero we % assume that the remaining argument string represents a version % and change |\pkgcls@targetdate| and set |\pkgcls@targetlabel| to -% the version name (after stripping off the trailing \texttt{=}. +% the version name (after stripping off the trailing \texttt{=}). % \begin{macrocode} \ifnum \pkgcls@targetdate=\z@ \pkgcls@targetdate\@ne @@ -3695,7 +3819,7 @@ % late, but if there wasn't one (i.e., if current release is the % oldest that exists) we use it as the best choice. However in % that case something is wrong (as there shouldn't be a rollback to -% a date where a package used doesn't yet exists. So we make a +% a date when a package used didn't yet exists). So we make a % complained to the user. % \begin{macrocode} \ifx\pkgcls@candidate\@empty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmd.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmd.dtx index 0a6cb1a53c5..69bd162e56b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmd.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmd.dtx @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ %%% From File: ltcmd.dtx % % \begin{macrocode} -\def\ltcmdversion{v1.2a} -\def\ltcmddate{2023-08-19} +\def\ltcmdversion{v1.2e} +\def\ltcmddate{2024-04-17} % \end{macrocode} % %<*driver> @@ -415,8 +415,6 @@ \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_cmd_internal:Nnnn #1#2#3#4 { \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_function_tl { \cs_to_str:N #1 } - \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_fn_tl - { \exp_not:c { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl } } \@@_normalize_arg_spec:n {#2} \exp_args:No \@@_prepare_signature:n \l_@@_arg_spec_tl \@@_declare_cmd_code:Nnn #1 {#2} {#3} @@ -435,17 +433,93 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % +% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_all_m_check:n, \@@_all_m_check_aux:n} +% A quick loop to check for all |(+)m|-type arguments. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_all_m_check:n #1 + { \tl_map_function:nN {#1} \@@_all_m_check_aux:n } +\cs_new:Npn \@@_all_m_check_aux:n #1 + { + \str_if_eq:nnF {#1} { m } + { + \str_if_eq:nnF {#1} { + } + { X } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% % \begin{macro}{\@@_declare_cmd_code:Nnn} % \begin{macro} -% {\@@_declare_cmd_code_aux:Nnn, \@@_declare_cmd_code_expandable:Nnn} -% The appropriate auxiliary is called. +% { +% \@@_declare_cmd_optimized:Nnn, +% \@@_declare_cmd_code_aux:Nnn, +% \@@_declare_cmd_code_expandable:Nnn +% } +% \begin{macro}{\@@_start_optimized:} +% \changes{v1.2b}{2023/12/01} +% {Optimize cmd creation for all-\texttt{m} arguments} +% At this stage we can check for a short-cut possibility: if the argument +% specification is made up of just |(+)m| tokens, and if all arguments are +% either short or long, then we can produce an optimized document command. +% This only applies to document commands, not creation of environments (which +% are more complex). +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_cmd_code:Nnn #1#2 + { + \bool_lazy_any:nTF + { + { \l_@@_environment_bool } + { + \bool_lazy_and_p:nn + { \l_@@_some_short_bool } + { \l_@@_some_long_bool } + } + { ! \tl_if_blank_p:e { \@@_all_m_check:n {#2} } } + } + { + \tl_set:Nx \l_@@_fn_tl + { \exp_not:c { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl } } + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool + { \@@_declare_cmd_code_expandable:Nnn } + { \@@_declare_cmd_code_aux:Nnn } + } + { \@@_declare_cmd_optimized:Nnn } + #1 {#2} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% The optimized version of commands just has to worry about whether to make +% them protected or long. The commands start with an expandable marker so +% that other parts of the kernel know these are set up by \pkg{ltcmd}. +% We need the two layers of redirection so that the \texttt{code} internal +% function has the same form as it would for any other document command. +% Optimization means that there is no \cs{group_align_safe_begin:} before +% grabbing the arguments, so anything involving |&| tokens will not work. +% However, this is really only intended for making optional argument +% processing safe anyway, so in practice should not be an issue. % \begin{macrocode} -\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_cmd_code:Nnn +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_cmd_optimized:Nnn #1#2#3 { - \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_grab_expandably_bool - { \@@_declare_cmd_code_expandable:Nnn } - { \@@_declare_cmd_code_aux:Nnn } - } + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_expandable_bool + { \cs_set_nopar:Npe } + { \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npe } + #1 + { + \exp_not:N \@@_start_optimized: + \exp_not:c { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl code } + } + \exp_args:Ncc \cs_generate_from_arg_count:NNnn + { \l_@@_function_tl \c_space_tl code } + { + cs_set + \bool_if:NF \l_@@_expandable_bool { _protected } + \bool_if:NF \l_@@_some_long_bool { _nopar } + :Npn + } + \l_@@_current_arg_int + {#3} + } +\cs_new:Npn \@@_start_optimized: { } % \end{macrocode} % Standard functions call \cs{@@_start:nNNnnn}, which receives the % argument specification, an auxiliary used for @@ -544,6 +618,7 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\@@_declare_env:nnnn} % \begin{macro}{\@@_declare_env_internal:nnnn} @@ -1286,7 +1361,7 @@ % that is not possible without the risk of mistakenly grabbing the % entire brace group (potentially leading to a~\texttt{!~Runaway argument} % error) or trying to grab a |}|$_2$, leading to -% an~\verb|! Argument of \dots has an extra }| error. +% \iffalse{\fi an~\verb|! Argument of \dots has an extra }| error. % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_allowed_token_check:N #1 { @@ -1373,6 +1448,9 @@ % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\@@_add_arg_spec:n, \@@_add_arg_spec_mandatory:n} +% \changes{v1.2c}{2023/12/22} +% {Clarify error message when \texttt{!} prefix is applied to +% non-trailing opt-arg (gh/1198)} % When adding an argument to the argument specification, set the % \texttt{some_long} or \texttt{some_short} booleans as appropriate % and clear the booleans keeping track of |+|, |!| and |=| markers. @@ -1414,7 +1492,12 @@ \bool_if:NT \l_@@_some_obey_spaces_bool { \msg_error:nnxx { cmd } { invalid-bang } - { \@@_environment_or_command: } { \tl_to_str:n {#1} } + { \@@_environment_or_command: } + { + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_obey_spaces_bool + { \tl_to_str:n {'#1'} } + { an~optional~argument~before~mandatory~ \tl_to_str:n {'#1'} } + } \@@_bad_def:wn } \tl_clear:N \l_@@_last_delimiters_tl @@ -1626,8 +1709,10 @@ % argument, so we need to break out of one layer of braces in % \cs{l_@@_process_one_tl}, add copies of the processor as necessary, % and then return the removed brace. The function below does just -% that: it defines \cs{l_@@_process_one_tl} starting with a |}|$_2$ -% and ending with a |{|$_1$, so that it adds as many processors as +% that: it defines \cs{l_@@_process_one_tl} starting with a +% \iffalse{\fi |}|$_2$ +% and ending with a |{|$_1$, \iffalse}\fi +% so that it adds as many processors as % needed when |x|-expanded. % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_replicate_processor:nn #1 #2 @@ -2033,7 +2118,7 @@ % \begin{macro}{\@@_copy:NN} % \begin{macro}{\@@_set_eq_if_exist:NN,\@@_set_eq_if_exist:cc} % This macro just branches to the proper copying command by using -% \cs{@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnF}. The copying command takes the names +% \cs{@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnnF}. The copying command takes the names % of the commands to be copied to and from, and the actual commands % as its four arguments. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -2042,9 +2127,10 @@ \use:x { \int_set:Nn \tex_escapechar:D { 92 } - \exp_not:N \@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnF \exp_not:N #2 + \exp_not:N \@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnnF \exp_not:N #2 { \@@_copy_command:nnNN } { \@@_copy_expandable:nnNN } + { \@@_copy_optimized:nnNN } { \@@_copy_environment:nnNN } { \@@_copy_environment_end:nnNN } { \@@_cant_copy:nwn { non-ltcmd } } @@ -2186,6 +2272,24 @@ %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease % \end{macrocode} % +% \begin{macro}{\@@_copy_optimized:nnNN} +% Copy the code, simply define the wrapper. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_copy_optimized:nnNN #1#2#3#4 + { + \cs_set_eq:cc { #1 ~ code } { #2 ~ code } + \token_if_protected_macro:NTF #4 + { \cs_set_protected_nopar:Npe } + { \cs_set_nopar:Npe } + #3 + { + \exp_not:N \@@_start_optimized: + \exp_not:c { #1 ~ code } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% % \begin{macrocode} %<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/11/15}{\@@_copy:NN (part 2)}% %<latexrelease> {Support~\NewCommandCopy~in~ltcmd} @@ -2423,7 +2527,7 @@ % % \begin{macro}{\@@_show:N} % This macro just branches to the proper showing command by using -% \cs{@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnF}. The showing command takes the command +% \cs{@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnnF}. The showing command takes the command % to be shown as argument. % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_show:N #1 @@ -2431,9 +2535,10 @@ \use:x { \int_set:Nn \tex_escapechar:D { 92 } - \exp_not:N \@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnF \exp_not:N #1 + \exp_not:N \@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnnF \exp_not:N #1 { \@@_show_command:N } { \@@_show_expandable:N } + { \@@_show_optimized:N } { \@@_show_environment:N } { \@@_show_environment_end:N } { \@@_cant_copy:nwn { non-ltcmd } } @@ -2450,6 +2555,7 @@ % \@@_show_command:NnNNwN, % \@@_show_expandable:N, % \@@_show_expandable:NnNNNNnN, +% \@@_show_optimized:N, % \@@_show_command_aux:NnNNn, % \@@_show_environment:N, % \@@_show:x, @@ -2530,6 +2636,48 @@ } % \end{macrocode} % +% Optimized functions need things done a bit differently as we need to +% reconstruct the argument spec. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_show_optimized:N #1 + { + \exp_args:Nc \@@_show_optimized:NN + { \cs_to_str:N #1 \c_space_tl code } + #1 + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_show_optimized:NN #1#2 + { + \cs_set:Npe \@@_show_optimized_aux:N ##1 + { + \c_space_tl \c_space_tl \c_hash_str ##1 : + \bool_lazy_or:nnT + { \token_if_long_macro_p:N #1 } + { \token_if_protected_long_macro_p:N #1 } + { + } m + \iow_newline: + } + \tl_show:e + { + \token_to_str:N #2 = + \bool_lazy_or:nnF + { \token_if_protected_macro_p:N #1 } + { \token_if_protected_long_macro_p:N #1 } + { expandable ~ } document~command: + \iow_newline: + \int_step_function:nN + { + \int_div_truncate:nn + { \tl_count:e { \cs_parameter_spec:N #1 } } + { 2 } + } + \@@_show_optimized_aux:N + -> + \cs_replacement_spec:N #1 + } + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_count:n { e } +% \end{macrocode} +% % We can reuse most of the above to show an environment, except that % we need to ensure that the proper \cs[no-index]{environment~\ldots} % are passed to \cs{@@_show_command_aux:NnNNn}. Additionally, when @@ -3533,18 +3681,38 @@ % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\@@_grab_v_aux_put:N} +% \changes{v1.2d}{2024/03/21}{Collect \cs{endlinechar} as \cs{obeyedline}} % Storing one token in the collected argument. Most tokens are % converted to category code $12$, with the exception of active % characters, and spaces (not sure what should be done for those). % \begin{macrocode} +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2024/06/01}{\@@_grab_v_aux_put:N}% +%<latexrelease> {Endlines~as~\obeyedline} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_aux_put:N #1 { \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_v_arg_tl { \token_if_active:NTF #1 - { \exp_not:N #1 } { \token_to_str:N #1 } + { \exp_not:N #1 } + { + \int_compare:nNnTF {`#1} = \tex_endlinechar:D + { \exp_not:N \obeyedline } + { \token_to_str:N #1 } + } } } +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}{\@@_grab_v_aux_put:N}% +%<latexrelease> {Endlines~as~\obeyedline} +%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_grab_v_aux_put:N #1 +%<latexrelease> { +%<latexrelease> \tl_put_right:Nx \l_@@_v_arg_tl +%<latexrelease> { +%<latexrelease> \token_if_active:NTF #1 +%<latexrelease> { \exp_not:N #1 } { \token_to_str:N #1 } +%<latexrelease> } +%<latexrelease> } +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % @@ -4376,13 +4544,16 @@ % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\__kernel_cmd_if_xparse:NTF} -% \begin{macro}{\@@_cmd_type_cases:Nnnnn} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnnF} % \changes{v1.0d}{2021/04/19}{Renamed \cs{__cmd_cmd_if_xparse:NTF} to % \cs{__kernel_cmd_if_xparse:NTF} for cross-module usage} % \changes{v1.0d}{2021/07/30}{Added \cs{@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnF} for % \cs{NewCommandCopy} and \cs{ShowCommand} support} % \changes{v1.0l}{2022/03/18}{Fix \cs{@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnF} -%" prematurely expanding macros (gh/795)} +% prematurely expanding macros (gh/795)} +% \changes{v1.2b}{2023/12/01}{Extend for optimized commands} +% \changes{v1.2e}{2024/04/17}{Use \cs{__kernel_cs_parameter_spec:N} instead +% of \cs{cs_argument_spec:N}/\cs{cs_parameter_spec:N}} % \begin{macro}{\@@_cmd_if_xparse_aux:N} % % To determine whether the command is an \pkg{xparse} command check @@ -4390,36 +4561,38 @@ % that its |replacement_spec| starts with either % \cs{@@_start:nNNnnn} (non-expandable command) or % \cs{@@_start_expandable:nNNNNn} (expandable command) or +% \cs{@@_start_optimized:} (optimized command) or % \cs{@@_start_env:nnnnn} (environment) or % \cs[no-index]{environment~\#1~end~aux} (environment end). % % This conditional is needed in several kernel modules and is % therefore has a kernel-internal name. % \begin{macrocode} -\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnF #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnnF #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 { \exp_args:Ne \str_case_e:nnF { - \exp_args:Nf \tl_if_empty:nT { \cs_argument_spec:N #1 } + \exp_args:Nf \tl_if_empty:nT { \__kernel_cs_parameter_spec:N #1 } { \exp_not:N \exp_not:n { \exp_not:e { \tl_head:N #1 } } } } { { \exp_not:N \@@_start:nNNnnn } {#2} { \exp_not:N \@@_start_expandable:nNNNNn } {#3} - { \exp_not:N \@@_start_env:nnnnn } {#4} + { \exp_not:N \@@_start_optimized: } {#4} + { \exp_not:N \@@_start_env:nnnnn } {#5} { \exp_after:wN \exp_not:N \cs:w environment~ \exp_last_unbraced:Ne \use_none:nnn { \cs_to_str:N #1 } ~end~aux \cs_end: - } {#5} + } {#6} } - {#6} + {#7} } \cs_new_protected:Npn \__kernel_cmd_if_xparse:NTF #1 { - \@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnF #1 - { } { } { } { } { \use_iii:nnn } + \@@_cmd_type_cases:NnnnnnF #1 + { } { } { } { } { } { \use_iii:nnn } \use_i:nn } % \end{macrocode} @@ -4511,10 +4684,8 @@ \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_environment_bool { environment ~ ' \l_@@_environment_str ' } { - command ~ ' - \exp_args:Nf \tl_trim_spaces:n - { \exp_after:wN \token_to_str:N \l_@@_fn_tl } - ' + command ~ + ' \c_backslash_str \tl_to_str:N \l_@@_function_tl ' } } % \end{macrocode} @@ -4522,6 +4693,8 @@ % % Some messages intended as errors when defining commands/environments. % \changes{v1.0f}{2021/06/04}{Normalize various error messages} +% \changes{v1.2c}{2023/12/22} +% {Generalize message \texttt{invalid-bang} (gh/1198)} % \begin{macrocode} \msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { arg-after-body } { Argument~type~'b'~must~be~last~in~#1. } @@ -4612,7 +4785,7 @@ { Invalid~argument~prefix~'!'~in~#1. } { The~prefix~'!'~is~only~allowed~for~trailing~optional~arguments.~ - You~tried~to~apply~it~to~'#2'. + You~tried~to~apply~it~to~#2. \c_@@_ignore_def_tl } \msg_new:nnnn { cmd } { not-definable } diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmdhooks.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmdhooks.dtx index 73bd7f63518..f8a8699d7ed 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmdhooks.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcmdhooks.dtx @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -%% File: ltcmdhooks.dtx +%% From File: ltcmdhooks.dtx %% Copyright (C) 2020-2024 %% Frank Mittelbach, Phelype Oleinik, The LaTeX Project % @@ -12,16 +12,20 @@ % https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt % % -%%% From File: ltcmdhooks.dtx -% -\def\ltcmdhooksversion{v1.0i} -\def\ltcmdhooksdate{2023/06/16} -% +% \fi % +% \iffalse +%%% From File: lthooks.dtx % %<*driver> +% \fi +\ProvidesFile{ltcmdhooks.dtx} + [2024/04/17 v1.0j LaTeX Kernel (Command hooks)] +% \iffalse +% \documentclass{l3doc} -%\usepackage{ltcmdhooks} +\GetFileInfo{ltcmdhooks.dtx} +% \usepackage{ltcmdhooks} \EnableCrossrefs \CodelineIndex \begin{document} @@ -38,7 +42,7 @@ % \providecommand\phoinline[1]{\begin{quote}\itshape\footnotesize PhO: #1\end{quote}} % % \title{The \texttt{ltcmdhooks} module\thanks{This file has version -% \ltcmdhooksversion\ dated \ltcmdhooksdate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ +% \fileversion\ dated \filedate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ % Project.}} % \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Phelype Oleinik} % @@ -125,8 +129,8 @@ % \item % % that code can be prepended or appended (i.e., added to the -% hooks) even if the command itself is not defined, because the -% defining package has not yet been loaded; +% hooks) even if the command itself is not (yet) defined, because the +% defining package has not been loaded at this point; % % \item % @@ -214,6 +218,14 @@ % optional and mandatory arguments. By adding code to the % \hook{cmd/section/after} hook, you get in the way of that scanning. % +% In such a case, where it is known that a specific generic command +% hook does not work if code is added to it, the package author can +% add a \cs{DisableGenericHook}\footnote{Please use +% \cs{DisableGenericHook} if at all, only on hooks that you +% \enquote{own}, i.e., for commands your package or class defines and +% not second guess whether or not hooks of other packages should get +% disabled!} declaration to prevent this from happening in user +% documents and thereby avoiding obscure errors. % % % \section{Package Author Interface} @@ -394,6 +406,8 @@ % \end{macrocode} % % \changes{v1.0b}{2021/05/24}{Use \cs{msg_...} instead of \cs{__kernel_msg...}} +% \changes{v1.0j}{2024/04/17}{Use \cs{__kernel_cs_parameter_spec:N} instead +% of \cs{cs_argument_spec:N}/\cs{cs_parameter_spec:N}} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*2ekernel|latexrelease> @@ -643,7 +657,7 @@ } } % \end{macrocode} -% and a conditional \cs{@@_if_public_command:N} to check if a command +% and a conditional \cs{@@_if_public_command:NTF} to check if a command % has |__| in its name (no other checking is performed). Primitives % with |:D| in their name could be included here, but they are already % discarded in the \cs{token_if_macro:NTF} test above. @@ -838,14 +852,14 @@ \@@_patch_debug:x { ++~command~can~be~patched~without~rescanning } % \end{macrocode} % We'll start by counting the number of arguments in the command by -% counting the number of characters in the \cs{cs_argument_spec:N} of +% counting the number of characters in the \cs{cs_parameter_spec:N} of % the macro, divided by two, and subtracting one if the command has an % optional argument (that is, an extra |[]| in its % \meta{parameter text}). % \begin{macrocode} \int_set:Nn \l_@@_patch_num_args_int { - \exp_args:Nf \str_count:n { \cs_argument_spec:N #2 } / 2 + \exp_args:Nf \str_count:n { \__kernel_cs_parameter_spec:N #2 } / 2 \bool_if:NT #1 { -1 } } % \end{macrocode} @@ -998,7 +1012,7 @@ %<latexrelease> \@@_patch_debug:x { ++~command~can~be~patched~without~rescanning } %<latexrelease> \int_set:Nn \l_@@_patch_num_args_int %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \exp_args:Nf \str_count:n { \cs_argument_spec:N #2 } / 2 +%<latexrelease> \exp_args:Nf \str_count:n { \__kernel_cs_parameter_spec:N #2 } / 2 %<latexrelease> \bool_if:NT #1 { -1 } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \int_compare:nNnTF { \l_@@_patch_num_args_int } > { \c_zero_int } @@ -1248,12 +1262,12 @@ % top-level macro with no arguments, so testing this first would % short-circuit \tn{robust@command@act} and the top-level macros would % be incorrectly patched. In that case, we just check if the -% \cs{cs_argument_spec:N} is empty, and call +% \cs{cs_parameter_spec:N} is empty, and call % \cs{@@_patch_expand_redefine:NNnn}. % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_retokenize_patch:Nnn #1 #2 #3 { - \str_if_eq:eeTF { \cs_argument_spec:N #1 } { } + \str_if_eq:eeTF { \__kernel_cs_parameter_spec:N #1 } { } { \@@_patch_expand_redefine:NNnn \c_false_bool #1 {#2} {#3} } { \@@_patch_debug:x { ..~command~can~only~be~patched~by~rescanning } diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx index c58ad2dcb61..006486d23b2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltcounts.dtx} - [2021/07/08 v1.1m LaTeX Kernel (Counters)] + [2021/11/08 v1.1n LaTeX Kernel (Counters)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltcounts.dtx} @@ -305,6 +305,7 @@ % \begin{macro}{\@definecounter} % \changes{v1.1b}{1995/05/20}{Streamlined code} % \changes{v1.1c}{1995/05/20}{And do it right} +% \changes{v1.1n}{2023/11/07}{Do not change \cs{the...} if already defined (gh/823)} % % \begin{macrocode} \def\@definecounter#1{\expandafter\newcount\csname c@#1\endcsname @@ -312,9 +313,21 @@ \global\expandafter\let\csname cl@#1\endcsname\@empty \@addtoreset{#1}{@ckpt}% \global\expandafter\let\csname p@#1\endcsname\@empty +% \end{macrocode} +% If \cs{the\#1} is undefined or \cs{relax} we define it with the +% standard definition for counters, otherwise we warn. This will +% catch, for example, that somebody defines a counter named +% ``index'' conflicting with the \env{theindex} environment. +% \begin{macrocode} \expandafter - \gdef\csname the#1\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter - {\expandafter\@arabic\csname c@#1\endcsname}} + \ifx\csname the#1\endcsname\relax + \expandafter + \gdef\csname the#1\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter + {\expandafter\@arabic\csname c@#1\endcsname}% + \else + \@latex@warning{Command `\string\the#1' already + defined -- not changed}% + \fi} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx index 24c13696985..d9ec12e75a6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltdefns.dtx} - [2022/11/24 v1.5s LaTeX Kernel (definition commands)] + [2024/04/17 v1.5t LaTeX Kernel (definition commands)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltdefns.dtx} @@ -91,6 +91,9 @@ % \changes{v1.4b}{2015/02/21} % {Removed autoload support} % \changes{v1.5l}{2020/08/21}{Integration of new hook management interface} +% \changes{v1.5t}{2024/04/17} +% {Rename \cs{@expl@cs@argument@spec@@N} to +% \cs{@expl@cs@parameter@spec@@N} (gh/1014)} % % \section{Definitions} % @@ -215,12 +218,12 @@ % This section defines the following commands: % % \DescribeMacro -% {\@namedef}\marg{NAME}\\ Expands to |\def\|\marg{NAME}, +% {\@namedef}\marg{NAME}\\ Expands to |\def\|\meta{NAME}, % except name can contain any characters. % % \DescribeMacro % {\@nameuse}\marg{NAME}\\ -% Expands to |\|\marg{NAME}. +% Expands to |\|\meta{NAME}. % % \DescribeMacro % {\@ifnextchar} X\marg{YES}\marg{NO}\\ @@ -530,9 +533,11 @@ % This macro encapsulates the most common call to |\@ifnextchar|, saving % several tokens each time it is used in the definition of a command % with an optional argument. -% |#1| The code to execute in the case that there is a |[| need not be +% |#1| The code to execute in the case that there is a |[| \iffalse]\fi +% need not be % a single token but can be any sequence of commands that `expects' to -% be followed by |[|. If this command were only used in |\newcommand| +% be followed by |[|. \iffalse]\fi +% If this command were only used in |\newcommand| % definitions then |#1| would be a single token and the braces could % be omitted from |{#1}| in the definition below, saving a bit of % memory. @@ -595,7 +600,7 @@ % required argument spec by using a delimited argument (delimited % by the digit). This is faster and uses less tokens. The coding % is slightly odd to preserve the old interface (using |#2| = -% |\tw@| as the flag to surround the first argument with |[]|. But +% |\tw@| as the flag to surround the first argument with |[]|). But % the new method did not allow for the number of arguments |#3| not % being given as an explicit digit; hence (further expansion of % this argument and use of) |\number| was added later in 1999. @@ -706,13 +711,14 @@ % \begin{macro}{\newenvironment} % Define a new user environment. % |#1| is the environment name. |#2#| Grabs all the tokens up to -% the first |{|. These will be any optional arguments. They are not +% the first |{|. \iffalse}\fi +% These will be any optional arguments. They are not % parsed at this point, but are just passed to |\@newenv| which % will eventually call |\newcommand|. Any optional arguments will % then be parsed by |\newcommand| as it defines the command that % executes the `begin code' of the environment. % -% This |#2#| trick removed with version 1.2i as it fails if a |{| +% This |#2#| trick removed with version 1.2i as it fails if a |{| \iffalse}\fi % occurs in the optional argument. Now use |\@ifnextchar| directly. % \begin{macrocode} \def\newenvironment{\@star@or@long\new@environment} @@ -888,7 +894,8 @@ % \begin{macro}{\@check@c} % \changes{v1.2i}{1995/04/25}{Make \cs{long} for latex/1346} % |\CheckCommand| itself just grabs all the arguments we need, -% without actually looking for |[| optional argument forms. Now +% without actually looking for |[| \iffalse]\fi +% optional argument forms. Now % define |\reserved@a|. If |\\reserved@a| is then defined, compare it % with the ``|\#1|' otherwise compare |\reserved@a| with |#1|. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -2016,7 +2023,7 @@ \long\def\@show@newcommand@aux#1#2#3{% \typeout{> \string#1=\@expl@cs@prefix@spec@@N#1macro:}% #3{default \string##1=\expandafter\detokenize\@gobblethree#2.^^J% - \@expl@cs@argument@spec@@N#1->\@expl@cs@replacement@spec@@N#1}} + \@expl@cs@parameter@spec@@N#1->\@expl@cs@replacement@spec@@N#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} @@ -2117,7 +2124,7 @@ \@show@environment@end#1} \long\def\@show@environment@begin#1{% \typeout{> \string\begin{\@expl@cs@to@str@@N#1}=environment:}% - \typeout{\@expl@cs@argument@spec@@N#1->% + \typeout{\@expl@cs@parameter@spec@@N#1->% \@expl@cs@replacement@spec@@N#1.^^J}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} @@ -2139,7 +2146,7 @@ \long\def\@show@environment@end@aux#1#2{% \@show@tokens{\string\end{\@expl@cs@to@str@@N#2}% \ifx\relax#1=undefined% - \else:^^J\@expl@cs@argument@spec@@N#1->% + \else:^^J\@expl@cs@parameter@spec@@N#1->% \@expl@cs@replacement@spec@@N#1% \fi}} % \end{macrocode} @@ -2158,7 +2165,7 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \def\@show@nonstop#1{% \typeout{> \string#1=\@expl@cs@prefix@spec@@N#1macro:^^J% - \@expl@cs@argument@spec@@N#1->\@expl@cs@replacement@spec@@N#1.}} + \@expl@cs@parameter@spec@@N#1->\@expl@cs@replacement@spec@@N#1.}} \def\@show@typeout#1{\typeout{> #1.^^J}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} @@ -2296,7 +2303,7 @@ % \changes{v1.3g}{2004/01/23}{Added macro (pr/3501)} % This macro is the kernel version of |\@ifnextchar| which is used % in a couple of places to prevent the AMS variant from being used -% since in some places this produced chaos (for example +% since in some places this produced chaos. For example, % if an \texttt{fd} file % is loaded in a random place then the optional argument to % |\ProvidesFile| could get printed there instead of being written diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx index ef959c56939..917431552b7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx @@ -36,8 +36,10 @@ %</unstripped> %<*driver> % \fi +% \fi \ProvidesFile{ltdirchk.dtx} - [2021/12/11 v1.3a LaTeX Kernel (System Dependent Parts)] + [2024/02/11 v1.3a LaTeX Kernel (System Dependent Parts)] +% \iffalse % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltdirchk.dtx} @@ -261,6 +263,10 @@ % In current formats enable primitives with unprefixed names. % the \textsf{latexrelease} guards allow the primitives to be % defined with a |\luatex| prefix if older formats are specified. +% +% The unprefixed forms are \emph{not} undefined for improved +% compatibility with external packages when rolling back +% the format. % \begin{macrocode} %</initex> %</dircheck> @@ -278,25 +284,6 @@ %<latexrelease> "luatex", %<latexrelease> tex.extraprimitives("core","omega", "aleph", "luatex") %<latexrelease> ) -%<latexrelease> local i -%<latexrelease> local t = { } -%<latexrelease> for _,i in pairs(tex.extraprimitives("luatex")) do -%<latexrelease> if not string.match(i,"^U") then -%<latexrelease> if not string.match(i, "^luatex") then -%<latexrelease> table.insert(t,i) -%<latexrelease> end -%<latexrelease> else -%<latexrelease> if string.match(i,"^Uchar$") then -%<latexrelease> table.insert(t,i) -%<latexrelease> end -%<latexrelease> end -%<latexrelease> end -%<latexrelease> for _,i in pairs(t) do -%<latexrelease> tex.print( -%<latexrelease> "\noexpand\\let\noexpand\\" .. i -%<latexrelease> .. "\noexpand\\undefined" -%<latexrelease> ) -%<latexrelease> end %<latexrelease>} %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease %<latexrelease>\fi @@ -1000,8 +987,8 @@ % \begin{macro}{\@TeXversion} % \TeX\ versions older than 3.141 require |\@TeXversion| to be % set. This can be determined automatically due to a trick suggested -% by Bernd Raichle. (Actually this will not always get the correct -% version number, eg \TeX3.14 would be detected as \TeX3, but \LaTeX\ +% by Bernd Raichle. Actually this will not always get the correct +% version number, e.g., \TeX3.14 would be detected as \TeX3, but \LaTeX\ % only needs to take account of \TeX's older than 3, or between 3 and % 3.14. % \changes{v1.0h}{1994/10/11} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltexpl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltexpl.dtx index 4aaf799e325..410235a056c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltexpl.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltexpl.dtx @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltexpl.dtx} - [2023/10/13 v1.3g LaTeX Kernel (expl3-dependent code)] + [2024/04/17 v1.3h LaTeX Kernel (expl3-dependent code)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltexpl.dtx} @@ -356,9 +356,19 @@ % \changes{v1.2e}{2020/08/19} % {Add \cs{@expl@cs@\meta{thing}@spec@@N} % for \cs{ShowCommand} (gh/373)} +% \changes{v1.3h}{2024/04/17} +% {Rename \cs{@expl@cs@argument@spec@@N} to +% \cs{@expl@cs@parameter@spec@@N} (gh/1014)} +% \changes{v1.3h}{2024/04/17} +% {Update name of \pkg{expl3} function} +% \changes{v1.3h}{2024/04/17} +% {Add a kernel-level copy of \cs{cs_parameter_spec:N}} % \begin{macrocode} \cs_gset_eq:NN \@expl@cs@prefix@spec@@N \cs_prefix_spec:N -\cs_gset_eq:NN \@expl@cs@argument@spec@@N \cs_argument_spec:N +\cs_if_exist:NTF \cs_parameter_spec:N + { \cs_gset_eq:NN \@expl@cs@parameter@spec@@N \cs_parameter_spec:N } + { \cs_gset_eq:NN \@expl@cs@parameter@spec@@N \cs_argument_spec:N } +\cs_gset_eq:NN \__kernel_cs_parameter_spec:N \@expl@cs@parameter@spec@@N \cs_gset_eq:NN \@expl@cs@replacement@spec@@N \cs_replacement_spec:N % \end{macrocode} % @@ -387,7 +397,7 @@ %<latexrelease>\let \@expl@cs@to@str@@N \@undefined %<latexrelease>\let \@expl@str@if@eq@@nnTF \@undefined %<latexrelease>\let \@expl@cs@prefix@spec@@N \@undefined -%<latexrelease>\let \@expl@cs@argument@spec@@N \@undefined +%<latexrelease>\let \@expl@cs@parameter@spec@@N \@undefined %<latexrelease>\let \@expl@cs@replacement@spec@@N \@undefined %<latexrelease>\let \@expl@str@map@function@@NN \@undefined %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfilehook.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfilehook.dtx index 4f88b928712..02e95d0f8fa 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfilehook.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfilehook.dtx @@ -30,16 +30,22 @@ % %%% From File: ltfilehook.dtx % -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\ltfilehookversion{v1.0o} -\providecommand\ltfilehookdate{2023/07/10} -% \end{macrocode} -% +% \fi +%\iffalse +%<*driver,structuredlog> +%\fi +\def\ltfilehookdate{2024/03/13} +\def\ltfilehookversion{v1.0o} +%\iffalse +%</driver,structuredlog> %<*driver> - +%\fi +\expanded{\noexpand\ProvidesFile{ltfilehook.dtx} +[\ltfilehookdate\space \ltfilehookversion\space LaTeX Kernel (hooks)]} +% \iffalse +% \documentclass{l3doc} - \providecommand\InternalDetectionOff{} \providecommand\InternalDetectionOn{} @@ -375,7 +381,7 @@ % % % -% \subsection{Internal interfaces for \LaTeX{}} +% \subsection{Kernel, class, and package interfaces for \LaTeX{}} % % \begin{function}{\declare@file@substitution,\undeclare@file@substitution} % \begin{syntax} @@ -393,6 +399,8 @@ % example, or to provide a version that makes use of new kernel % functionality while the original package remains available for % use with older releases. +% As such it is mainly meant for use in the \LaTeX{} kernel but +% other use cases are conceivable. % % The \cs{undeclare@file@substitution} declaration undoes a % substitution made earlier. @@ -407,10 +415,10 @@ % % \begin{function}{\disable@package@load,\reenable@package@load} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{disable@package@load} \Arg{package} \Arg{alternate-code} +% \cs{disable@package@load} \Arg{package} \Arg{alternate-code} % \cs{reenable@package@load} \Arg{package} % \end{syntax} -% If \meta{package} is requested do not load it but instead run +% If \meta{package} is requested, do not load it but instead run % \meta{alternate-code} which could issue a warning, error or any % other code. % @@ -421,7 +429,9 @@ % are not available. % % The function is only implemented for packages not for arbitrary -% files. +% files and again it should only be applied if there are good +% reasons for doing this.\footnote{Just to be sure: \enquote{I don't +% like this package by somebody else} is not a good one :-)} % \end{function} % % @@ -1328,7 +1338,7 @@ % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % -% \begin{macro}{flag @@_file_replaced} +% \begin{macro}{@@_file_replaced} % \begin{macro}{\@@_if_file_replaced:TF} % \begin{macro}{\@@_clear_replacement_flag:} % Since the file replacement is done expandably in a \cs{csname}, use diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx index 92a957f6c51..2e2a8884a01 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltfiles.dtx} - [2023/06/17 v1.2u LaTeX Kernel (File Handling)] + [2024/02/08 v1.2v LaTeX Kernel (File Handling)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltfiles.dtx} @@ -1087,7 +1087,7 @@ % \texttt{-1} we ensure that we don't get a backslash in front. As a % result we end up with all characters as catcode 12 (plus % spaces). We then sometimes add quotes around the construct -% (removing any existing inner quotes. Sometimes we only remove the +% (removing any existing inner quotes). Sometimes we only remove the % quotes if they have been supplied by the user. There is clearly % some room for improvement. % @@ -1682,6 +1682,22 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % +% \begin{macro}{\if@listfiles@hashes} +% \changes{v1.2v}{2023/11/15}{Extend file list information} +% \begin{macro}{\if@listfiles@sizes} +% \changes{v1.2v}{2023/11/15}{Extend file list information} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOn +\keys_define:nn { __kernel / listfiles } + { + hashes .legacy_if_set:n = @listfiles@hashes , + sizes .legacy_if_set:n = @listfiles@sizes + } +\ExplSyntaxOff +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% % \begin{macro}{\listfiles} % A preamble command to cause |\end{document}| to list files input % from the main file. @@ -1693,8 +1709,10 @@ % {Stop \cs{listfiles} being run twice} % \changes{v1.0i}{1994/10/18} % {code moved here from ltclass} +% \changes{v1.2v}{2023/11/15}{Extend file list information} % \begin{macrocode} -\def\listfiles{% +\NewDocumentCommand\listfiles{O{}}{% + \SetKeys[__kernel/listfiles]{#1}% \let\listfiles\relax \def\@listfiles##1##2##3##4##5##6##7##8##9\@@{% \def\reserved@d{\\}% @@ -1730,9 +1748,40 @@ \filename@area\filename@base\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\@@ \typeout{% \filename@area\reserved@a - \ifx\reserved@b\relax\else\@spaces\reserved@b\fi}}% + \ifx\reserved@b\relax\else\@spaces\reserved@b\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Now we add the additional information if requested. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifnum0% + \if@listfiles@hashes1\fi + \if@listfiles@sizes1\fi + >0 % + ^^J\@spaces + (% + \if@listfiles@sizes + size \@dofilelist@size\@currname + \if@listfiles@hashes + , % + \fi + \fi + \if@listfiles@hashes + hash \@dofilelist@hash\@currname + \fi + )% + \fi + }}% \typeout{ ***********^^J}}} % \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\@dofilelist@hash} +% \begin{macro}{\@dofilelist@size} +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOn +\cs_new_eq:NN \@dofilelist@hash \file_mdfive_hash:n +\cs_new_eq:NN \@dofilelist@size \file_size:n +\ExplSyntaxOff +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % % \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/03/13} % {Reset \cs{@addtofilelist} at begin document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx index f495cd41928..648e3e1b8bd 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltfinal.dtx} - [2023/05/30 v2.3c LaTeX Kernel (Final Settings)] + [2024/02/08 v2.3c LaTeX Kernel (Final Settings)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltfinal.dtx} @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % -% \begin{macro}{trace\string_stack\string_levels} +% \begin{macro}{trace_stack_levels} % Now define the Lua function to emulate \cs{tracingstacklevels} and % install it in the |input_level_string| callback. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1384,7 +1384,7 @@ % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\@filelist} -% \changes{v1.0w}{1995/10/19}{Move after \cs{reserved@a} setting:-)} +% \changes{v1.0w}{1995/10/19}{Move after \cs{reserved@a} setting} % \begin{macro}{\@addtofilelist} % Reset |\@filelist| so files input while making the format are not % listed. The list built up so far may take up a lot of memory and so diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx index a07e5e81dae..ef057def0b8 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ % %<*driver> % \fi -\ProvidesFile{ltfloat.dtx}[2021/10/14 v1.2g LaTeX Kernel (Floats)] +\ProvidesFile{ltfloat.dtx}[2024/04/22 v1.2g LaTeX Kernel (Floats)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltfloat.dtx} @@ -559,7 +559,7 @@ % set globally to false when they are definitely true. % % If anyone is unhappy with this argument then both flags should be -% treated as in |\set@nobreak|; otherwise this command will be +% treated as in |\@setnobreak|; otherwise this command will be % redundant. % \changes{v1.1p}{1996/10/24} % {Added local settings of flags: dangerous!!} @@ -1061,7 +1061,7 @@ % set globally to false when they are definitely true. % % If anyone is unhappy with this argument then both flags should be -% treated as in |\set@nobreak|; otherwise this command will be +% treated as in |\@setnobreak|; otherwise this command will be % redundant. % \changes{v1.1p}{1996/10/24} % {Added local settings of flags: dangerous!!} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx index 360a4de8a49..097b8f692e4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltfntcmd.dtx} - [2021/09/12 v3.5a LaTeX Kernel (Font commands)] + [2023/12/26 v3.5a LaTeX Kernel (Font commands)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltfntcmd.dtx} @@ -393,9 +393,9 @@ % \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{textulc} -% \begin{macro}{textsw} -% \begin{macro}{textssc} +% \begin{macro}{\textulc} +% \begin{macro}{\textsw} +% \begin{macro}{\textssc} % % \changes{v3.4c}{2019/12/17}{Macro added} % \begin{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssaxes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssaxes.dtx index 6fefa5cee9a..8b5014a4cc1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssaxes.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssaxes.dtx @@ -28,14 +28,14 @@ % \fi % \iffalse %%% From File: ltfssaxes.dtx -%% Copyright (C) 1999-2020 Frank Mittelbach +%% Copyright (C) 2019-2020 Frank Mittelbach % %<*driver> % \fi % % \ProvidesFile{ltfssaxes.dtx} - [2023/10/30 v1.0i LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Axes handing)] + [2024/02/08 v1.0i LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Axes handing)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \begin{document} @@ -1087,7 +1087,7 @@ % % Shapes are also split in two axes (though it could be more if % that is desirable), essentially building in an ``sc'' -% axis). +% axis. % % \begin{macrocode} %<*2ekernel|latexrelease> @@ -1118,7 +1118,7 @@ % resets everything and \texttt{up} changes italic or slanted to % upright and \texttt{ulc} undoes small caps. % -% So we now offer \cs{normalshape} (using \cs{shapedefault} which +% So we now offer \cs{normalshape} (using \cs{shapedefault}) which % is normally the same as calling both \cs{ulcshape} and % \cs{upshape}, only more efficient. % @@ -1494,7 +1494,7 @@ % provide. So its redefinitions for the various shape commands, % such as \cs{itshape} should no longer happen. We therefore force % the standard definitions at \cs{AtBeginDocument} (later when this -% is defined. Once +% is defined). Once % \texttt{fontaxes} is no longer doing such redefinitions that could % be taken out again. % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx index eaea328dac3..df02a5749a7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ % % \ProvidesFile{ltfssbas.dtx} - [2023/10/21 v3.2l LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Basic Macros)] + [2024/02/08 v3.2l LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Basic Macros)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \begin{document} @@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ % case, however, we also need the value of |\baselineskip|. As the % first argument to |\set@fontsize| we pass the current value of % |\baselinestretch|. This will either match the internal value (in -% which case nothing changes, or it will be an updated value due to +% which case nothing changes) or it will be an updated value due to % a user change of that macro using |\renewcommand|. If we would % pass the internal |\f@linespread| such a change would be % effectively overwritten by a size change. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx index 273ed4babd3..255abe03f3a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ % % \ProvidesFile{ltfssini.dtx} - [2021/09/10 v3.2i LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Initialisation)] + [2024/02/08 v3.2i LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Initialisation)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \begin{document} @@ -864,7 +864,7 @@ % % If \cs{bfdefault} and \cs{bfdefault@previous} are different then % the default got changed directly through the legacy interface -% (i.e., via \cs{def} or \cs{renewcommand}. In that case we reset +% (i.e., via \cs{def} or \cs{renewcommand}). In that case we reset % all meta family defaults so that the document behaves like it was % the case before the new mechanism was introduced. % \changes{v3.1k}{2020/03/19}{Support legacy use of \cs{bfdefault} @@ -885,7 +885,7 @@ \let\bfdefault@previous\bfdefault % \end{macrocode} % And we reset the meta family defaults (\cs{bfdef@ult} is an -% expanded version of \cs{bfdefault}. +% expanded version of \cs{bfdefault}). % \begin{macrocode} \let\bfseries@rm\bfdef@ult \let\bfseries@sf\bfdef@ult @@ -1661,8 +1661,8 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \def\emfontdeclare@clist{#2,#1}% % \end{macrocode} -% Then we execute current declaration. Appending |\selectfont| means one -% can write just |\fontshape{it}}| and that works then too. +% Then we execute the current declaration. Appending |\selectfont| means one +% can write just |\fontshape{it}| and that works then too. % \begin{macrocode} % \typeout{Use: \detokenize{#1}}% #1\selectfont diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx index f5dc2ad5898..4f0e43021aa 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ %<package> [2020/12/22 v3.0n Standard LaTeX package (font tracing)] % \fi % \ProvidesFile{ltfsstrc.dtx} -% [2021/04/26 v3.0o LaTeX Kernel (NFSS tracing)] +% [2024/02/08 v3.0o LaTeX Kernel (NFSS tracing)] % % \iffalse %<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ % % \item[debugshow] In addition to \texttt{infoshow} show also % changing of math fonts as far as possible (this option can produce a -% large amount of output. +% large amount of output). % % \item[loading] Show the name of external fonts when they are % loaded. This option shows only ``newly'' loaded fonts not those @@ -489,8 +489,8 @@ \let\f@shape@saved\f@shape \let\f@series@saved\f@series % \end{macrocode} -% The we run the delayed adjustments (which is using the -% \cs{..@without@substitution} commands +% Then we run the delayed adjustments (which use the +% \cs{..@without@substitution} commands): % \begin{macrocode} \delayed@f@adjustment % \end{macrocode} @@ -863,14 +863,15 @@ % % \TeX{} uses the math fonts that are current when the end of a % formula is reached. If we don't want to keep font setups local to -% every formula (which would result in an enormous overhead, we have +% every formula (which would result in an enormous overhead), we have % to be careful not to end up with the wrong setup in case formulas % are nested, e.g., we need to be able to handle % \begin{verbatim} % $ a=b+c \mbox{ \small for all $b$ and $c\in Z$}$ %\end{verbatim} % Here the inner formulae |b| and |c\in Z| are typeset in |\small| but -% we have to return to |\normalsize| before we reach the closing |$| +% we have to return to |\normalsize| before we reach the +% closing |$| \iffalse$\fi % of the outer formula. % % This is handled in the following way: @@ -1042,8 +1043,8 @@ % If so we first call the `=' macro (i.e.\ argument three) to set % up special things for the selected math group. Then we call % |\mathgroup| to select the group given by argument two and -% finally we place |#1| (i.e.\ the argument of the \meta{math -% alphabet identifier} at the end. This part of the code is +% finally we place |#1| (i.e., the argument of the \meta{math +% alphabet identifier}) at the end. This part of the code is % surrounded by two commands which behave like |\begingroup| % and |\endgroup| if we want \meta{math alphabet identifier}s % but will expand into |\@empty| if we want simply switches to @@ -1081,7 +1082,7 @@ % \begin{macro}{\math@egroup} % \changes{v1.0q}{1990/07/07}{Tracing code added.} If the % \texttt{margid} option is in force (which can be tested by -% looking at the definition of |\math@bgroup| we change the +% looking at the definition of |\math@bgroup|) we change the % |\math@egroup| command a bit to display the current \meta{math % group number} after it closes the scope of \meta{math alphabet} % with |\endgroup|. @@ -1385,7 +1386,7 @@ % It looks for font ranges with font size functions. It's operation % is rather simple: it discards everything up to the next size % specification and passes this on to |\is@range| for inspection. -% The specification (parameter |#2| is inserted again, in case +% The specification (parameter |#2|) is inserted again, in case % it is needed later. % \begin{macrocode} \def\extract@rangefontinfo#1<#2>{% @@ -1402,7 +1403,7 @@ % % From the way |\is@range| is called inside |\extract@rangefontinfo| % we see that |#2| is the character |>| if the size specification -% found is a simple one (as it does not contain a |-| character. +% found is a simple one (that does not contain a |-| character). % This is checked easily enough and |\extract@rangefontinfo| % called again. Note that the extra tokens inserted after the % |\@nil| in the call to |\is@range| appear at the beginning of diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthooks.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthooks.dtx index 446cdaae060..d282ff841c7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthooks.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthooks.dtx @@ -27,17 +27,16 @@ % \fi % % \iffalse -% %%% From File: lthooks.dtx % -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\lthooksversion{v1.1f} -\def\lthooksdate{2023/10/02} -% \end{macrocode} -% %<*driver> +% \fi +\ProvidesFile{lthooks.dtx} + [2024/04/22 v1.1h LaTeX Kernel (hooks)] +% \iffalse +% \documentclass{l3doc} - +\GetFileInfo{lthooks.dtx} \providecommand\InternalDetectionOff{} \providecommand\InternalDetectionOn{} @@ -62,7 +61,7 @@ % % % \title{\LaTeX{}'s hook management\thanks{This module has version -% \lthooksversion\ dated \lthooksdate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ +% \fileversion\ dated \filedate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ % Project.}} % % \author{Frank Mittelbach\thanks{Code improvements for speed and other goodies by Phelype Oleinik}} @@ -160,7 +159,7 @@ % \end{function} % % -% \begin{function}{\NewHookWithArguments} +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{\NewHookWithArguments} % \begin{syntax} % \cs{NewHookWithArguments} \Arg{hook} \Arg{number} % \end{syntax} @@ -172,7 +171,7 @@ % the current package name. See section~\ref{sec:default-label}. % \end{function} % -% \begin{function}{\NewReversedHookWithArguments} +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{\NewReversedHookWithArguments} % \begin{syntax} % \cs{NewReversedHookWithArguments} \Arg{hook} \Arg{number} % \end{syntax} @@ -184,7 +183,7 @@ % the current package name. See section~\ref{sec:default-label}. % \end{function} % -% \begin{function}{\NewMirroredHookPairWithArguments} +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{\NewMirroredHookPairWithArguments} % \begin{syntax} % \cs{NewMirroredHookPairWithArguments} \Arg{hook-1} \Arg{hook-2} \Arg{number} % \end{syntax} @@ -234,9 +233,9 @@ % (e.g., one used in code with \cs{UseHook} or % \cs{UseOneTimeHook}) without it being explicitly declared with % \cs{NewHook}). -% This command undoes the effect of \cs{DisableGenericHook}. % If the hook is already activated, this command does nothing. % +% Note that this command does not undo the effect of \cs{DisableGenericHook}. % See section~\ref{sec:generic-hooks} for a discussion of when this % declaration is appropriate. % \end{function} @@ -264,7 +263,7 @@ % A leading |.| is treated literally. % \end{function} % -% \begin{function}{\UseHookWithArguments} +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{\UseHookWithArguments} % \begin{syntax} % \cs{UseHookWithArguments} \Arg{hook} \Arg{number} \Arg{arg_1} \ldots \Arg{arg_n} % \end{syntax} @@ -314,7 +313,7 @@ % % \end{function} % -% \begin{function}{\UseOneTimeHookWithArguments} +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{\UseOneTimeHookWithArguments} % \begin{syntax} % \cs{UseOneTimeHookWithArguments} \Arg{hook} \Arg{number} \Arg{arg_1} \ldots \Arg{arg_n} % \end{syntax} @@ -340,7 +339,7 @@ % % \begin{function}{\AddToHook} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{AddToHook} \Arg{hook}\oarg{label}\Arg{code} +% \cs{AddToHook} \Arg{hook} \oarg{label} \Arg{code} % \end{syntax} % Adds \meta{code} to the \meta{hook} labeled by \meta{label}. % When the optional argument \meta{label} is not provided, the @@ -368,9 +367,9 @@ % See section~\ref{sec:default-label}. % \end{function} % -% \begin{function}{\AddToHookWithArguments} +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{\AddToHookWithArguments} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{AddToHookWithArguments} \Arg{hook}\oarg{label}\Arg{code} +% \cs{AddToHookWithArguments} \Arg{hook} \oarg{label} \Arg{code} % \end{syntax} % Works exactly like \cs{AddToHook}, except that the \meta{code} can % access the arguments passed to the hook using \verb|#1|, \verb|#2|, @@ -398,7 +397,7 @@ % % \begin{function}{\RemoveFromHook} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{RemoveFromHook} \Arg{hook}\oarg{label} +% \cs{RemoveFromHook} \Arg{hook} \oarg{label} % \end{syntax} % Removes any code labeled by \meta{label} from the \meta{hook}. % When the optional argument \meta{label} is not provided, the @@ -459,7 +458,7 @@ % % \begin{function}{\AddToHookNext} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{AddToHookNext} \Arg{hook}\Arg{code} +% \cs{AddToHookNext} \Arg{hook} \Arg{code} % \end{syntax} % Adds \meta{code} to the next invocation of the \meta{hook}. % The code is executed after the normal hook code has finished and @@ -505,9 +504,9 @@ % \end{function}\footnotetext{There is % no mechanism to reorder such code chunks (or delete them).} % -% \begin{function}{\AddToHookNextWithArguments} +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{\AddToHookNextWithArguments} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{AddToHookNextWithArguments} \Arg{hook}\Arg{code} +% \cs{AddToHookNextWithArguments} \Arg{hook} \Arg{code} % \end{syntax} % Works exactly like \cs{AddToHookNext}, but the \meta{code} can % contain references to the arguments of the \meta{hook} as described @@ -522,7 +521,7 @@ % % \begin{function}{\ClearHookNext} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{ClearHookNext}\Arg{hook} +% \cs{ClearHookNext} \Arg{hook} % \end{syntax} % Normally \cs{AddToHookNext} is only used when you know precisely % where it will apply and why you want some extra code at that @@ -746,7 +745,7 @@ % % \begin{function}{\DeclareHookRule} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{DeclareHookRule} \Arg{hook}\Arg{label1}\Arg{relation}\Arg{label2} +% \cs{DeclareHookRule} \Arg{hook} \Arg{label1} \Arg{relation} \Arg{label2} % \end{syntax} % Defines a relation between \meta{label1} and \meta{label2} for a % given \meta{hook}. If \meta{hook} is \texttt{??} this defines a default @@ -807,7 +806,7 @@ % % \begin{function}{\ClearHookRule} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{ClearHookRule}\Arg{hook}\Arg{label1}\Arg{label2} +% \cs{ClearHookRule} \Arg{hook} \Arg{label1} \Arg{label2} % \end{syntax} % Syntactic sugar for saying that \meta{label1} and \meta{label2} % are unrelated for the given \meta{hook}. @@ -817,7 +816,7 @@ % % \begin{function}{\DeclareDefaultHookRule} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{DeclareDefaultHookRule}\Arg{label1}\Arg{relation}\Arg{label2} +% \cs{DeclareDefaultHookRule} \Arg{label1} \Arg{relation} \Arg{label2} % \end{syntax} % This sets up a relation between \meta{label1} and \meta{label2} % for all hooks unless overwritten by a specific rule for a hook. @@ -1004,7 +1003,7 @@ % % \begin{function}{\DebugHooksOn,\DebugHooksOff} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{DebugHooksOn} +% \cs{DebugHooksOn} \ldots\ \cs{DebugHooksOff} % \end{syntax} % Turn the debugging of hook code on or off. This displays most changes % made to the hook data structures. The output is rather coarse and @@ -1044,7 +1043,7 @@ % the current package name. See section~\ref{sec:default-label}. % \end{function} % -% \begin{function}{ +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{ % \hook_new_with_args:nn, % \hook_new_reversed_with_args:nn, % \hook_new_pair_with_args:nnn @@ -1100,9 +1099,14 @@ % % % -% \begin{function}{\hook_use:n,\hook_use:nnw} +% \begin{function}{\hook_use:n} +% \begin{syntax} +% ~~\cs{hook_use:n} \Arg{hook} +% \end{syntax} +% \end{function} +% \vskip-1.2\baselineskip +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{\hook_use:nnw} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{hook_use:n} \Arg{hook} % \cs{hook_use:nnw} \Arg{hook} \Arg{number} \Arg{arg_1} \ldots \Arg{arg_n} % \end{syntax} % Executes the \Arg{hook} code followed (if set up) by the code for next @@ -1118,9 +1122,14 @@ % A leading |.| is treated literally. % \end{function} % -% \begin{function}{\hook_use_once:n,\hook_use_once:nnw} +% \begin{function}{\hook_use_once:n} % \begin{syntax} % \cs{hook_use_once:n} \Arg{hook} +% \end{syntax} +% \end{function} +% \vskip-1.2\baselineskip +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{\hook_use_once:nnw} +% \begin{syntax} % \cs{hook_use_once:nnw} \Arg{hook} \Arg{number} \Arg{arg_1} \ldots \Arg{arg_n} % \end{syntax} % Changes the \Arg{hook} status so that from now on any addition to @@ -1139,10 +1148,16 @@ % % \begin{function}{ % \hook_gput_code:nnn, +% } +% \begin{syntax} +% ~~~~~~~~~\cs{hook_gput_code:nnn} \Arg{hook} \Arg{label} \Arg{code} +% \end{syntax} +% \end{function} +% \vskip -1.2\baselineskip +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{ % \hook_gput_code_with_args:nnn % } % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{hook_gput_code:nnn} \Arg{hook} \Arg{label} \Arg{code} % \cs{hook_gput_code_with_args:nnn} \Arg{hook} \Arg{label} \Arg{code} % \end{syntax} % Adds a chunk of \meta{code} to the \meta{hook} labeled @@ -1168,10 +1183,17 @@ % % \begin{function}{ % \hook_gput_next_code:nn, +% } +% \begin{syntax} +% ~~~~~~~~~~~~~\cs{hook_gput_next_code:nn} \Arg{hook} \Arg{code} +% \end{syntax} +% \end{function} +% \vskip-1.2\baselineskip +% \begin{function}[added=2023-06-01]{ % \hook_gput_next_code_with_args:nn, % } % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{hook_gput_next_code:nn} \Arg{hook} \Arg{code} +% \cs{hook_gput_next_code_with_args:nn} \Arg{hook} \Arg{code} % \end{syntax} % Adds a chunk of \meta{code} for use only in the next invocation of the % \meta{hook}. Once used it is gone. @@ -1183,6 +1205,7 @@ % In that case, if an actual parameter token should be added to the % code, it should be doubled. % +% \end{function} % This is simpler than \cs{hook_gput_code:nnn}, the code is simply % appended to the hook in the order of declaration at the very end, % i.e., after all standard code for the hook got executed. @@ -1191,7 +1214,6 @@ % % The \meta{hook} can be specified using the dot-syntax to denote % the current package name. See section~\ref{sec:default-label}. -% \end{function} % % % \begin{function}{\hook_gclear_next_code:n} @@ -1527,7 +1549,7 @@ % \hook{cmd}, % \hook{env}, % \hook{file}, -% \hook{include} +% \hook{include}, % \hook{package}, and % \hook{class}, % and all these are available out of the box: you only have to @@ -1862,15 +1884,17 @@ % \item[\hook{env/\meta{env}/begin}] % % This hook is executed as part of \cs{begin} directly in front -% of the code specific to the environment start (e.g., the -% second argument of \cs{newenvironment}). Its scope is the -% environment body. +% of the code specific to the environment start (e.g., +% the third argument of \cs{NewDocumentEnvironment} and +% the second argument of \cs{newenvironment}). +% Its scope is the environment body. % % \item[\hook{env/\meta{env}/end}] % % This hook is executed as part of \cs{end} directly in front of the -% code specific to the end of the environment (e.g., the third -% argument of \cs{newenvironment}). +% code specific to the end of the environment (e.g., +% the forth argument of \cs{NewDocumentEnvironment} and +% the third argument of \cs{newenvironment}). % % \item[\hook{env/\meta{env}/after}] % @@ -2701,7 +2725,7 @@ % \hook_new:n, % \hook_new_with_args:nn % } -% \begin{macro}{@@_new:nn} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_new:nn} % The \cs{hook_new:n} declaration declares a new hook and expects % the hook \meta{name} as its argument, e.g., % \hook{begindocument}. @@ -3509,7 +3533,8 @@ \msg_error:nnnnn { hooks } { set-top-level } { for } { SetDefaultHookLabel } {#1} } - { \exp_args:Nx \@@_set_default_label:n { \@@_make_name:n {#1} } } + { \exp_args:Nx + \@@_set_default_label:n { \@@_make_name:n {#1} } } } \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_set_default_label:n #1 { @@ -3722,7 +3747,8 @@ %<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}{\hook_gput_code:nnn} %<latexrelease> {Providing~hooks} %<latexrelease>\cs_gset_protected:Npn \hook_gput_code:nnn #1 #2 -%<latexrelease> { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nnn \@@_gput_code:nnn {#1} {#2} } +%<latexrelease> { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nnn +%<latexrelease> \@@_gput_code:nnn {#1} {#2} } %<latexrelease>\cs_gset_protected:Npn \@@_gput_code:nnn #1 #2 #3 %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_if_execute_immediately:nTF {#1} @@ -3736,7 +3762,8 @@ %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_if_disabled:nTF {#1} %<latexrelease> { \msg_error:nnn { hooks } { hook-disabled } {#1} } -%<latexrelease> { \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} } +%<latexrelease> { \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn +%<latexrelease> {#1} {#2} {#3} } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } @@ -3748,7 +3775,8 @@ %<latexrelease> \on@line\space <-~ \tl_to_str:n{#3}} } %<latexrelease> \str_if_eq:nnTF {#2} { top-level } %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \str_if_eq:eeTF { top-level } { \@@_currname_or_default: } +%<latexrelease> \str_if_eq:eeTF { top-level } +%<latexrelease> { \@@_currname_or_default: } %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_init_structure:n {#1} %<latexrelease> \@@_tl_gput_right:cn { @@_toplevel~#1 } {#3} @@ -3756,7 +3784,8 @@ %<latexrelease> { \msg_error:nnn { hooks } { misused-top-level } {#1} } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \prop_get:cnNTF { g_@@_#1_code_prop } {#2} \l_@@_return_tl +%<latexrelease> \prop_get:cnNTF +%<latexrelease> { g_@@_#1_code_prop } {#2} \l_@@_return_tl %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \prop_gput:cno { g_@@_#1_code_prop } {#2} %<latexrelease> { \l_@@_return_tl #3 } @@ -3840,7 +3869,8 @@ % \changes{v1.1d}{2023/05/21} % {Changes to allow support arguments in cmd hooks (cmd-args).} % \begin{macrocode} -%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2023/06/01}{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn} +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2023/06/01} +%<latexrelease> {\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn} %<latexrelease> {Hooks~with~args} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn #1 { @@ -3857,31 +3887,38 @@ {#1} } %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease -%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/11/15}{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn} +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/11/15} +%<latexrelease> {\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn} %<latexrelease> {Standardise~generic~hook~names} %<latexrelease>\cs_gset_protected:Npn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn #1 %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wnTF #1 / / / \scan_stop: {#1} +%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wnTF #1 / / / \scan_stop: +%<latexrelease> {#1} %<latexrelease> \hook_gput_code:nnn %<latexrelease> \@@_gput_undeclared_hook:nnn %<latexrelease> {#1} %<latexrelease> } -%<latexrelease>\cs_gset_protected:Npn \@@_try_declaring_generic_next_hook:nn #1 +%<latexrelease>\cs_gset_protected:Npn +%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_next_hook:nn #1 %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wnTF #1 / / / \scan_stop: {#1} +%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wnTF #1 / / / \scan_stop: +%<latexrelease> {#1} %<latexrelease> \hook_gput_next_code:nn %<latexrelease> \@@_gput_next_do:nn %<latexrelease> {#1} %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease -%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn} +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01} +%<latexrelease> {\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn} %<latexrelease> {Standardise~generic~hook~names} -%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn #1 +%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn +%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nnn #1 %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nNNnn {#1} %<latexrelease> \hook_gput_code:nnn \@@_gput_undeclared_hook:nnn %<latexrelease> } -%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_try_declaring_generic_next_hook:nn #1 +%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn +%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_next_hook:nn #1 %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nNNnn {#1} %<latexrelease> \hook_gput_next_code:nn \@@_gput_next_do:nn @@ -3904,12 +3941,15 @@ % % \changes{v1.0s}{2021/09/28} % {Correct usage of older \cs{@@_if_file_hook:wTF} (gh/675)} +% \changes{v1.1h}{2024/01/24} +% {Correct usage of older \cs{@@_if_file_hook:wTF} (gh/1243)} % \begin{macrocode} %<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:nNNnn #1 %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \@@_if_file_hook:wTF #1 / \s_@@_mark +%<latexrelease> \@@_if_file_hook:wTF #1 / / \s_@@_mark %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \exp_args:Ne \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook_split:nNNnn +%<latexrelease> \exp_args:Ne +%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook_split:nNNnn %<latexrelease> { \exp_args:Ne \@@_file_hook_normalize:n {#1} } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> { \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook_split:nNNnn {#1} } @@ -3917,9 +3957,11 @@ % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} -%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook_split:nNNnn #1 #2 #3 +%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn +%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook_split:nNNnn #1 #2 #3 %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wnTF #1 / / / \scan_stop: {#1} +%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wnTF #1 / / / \scan_stop: +%<latexrelease> {#1} %<latexrelease> { #2 } %<latexrelease> { #3 } {#1} %<latexrelease> } @@ -3931,9 +3973,11 @@ % \changes{v1.1a}{2023/04/06} % {Changes to add hook arguments (hook-args).} % \begin{macrocode} -%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2023/06/01}{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn} +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2023/06/01} +%<latexrelease> {\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn} %<latexrelease> {Hooks~with~args} -\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn +\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn + \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn #1 / #2 / #3 / #4 \scan_stop: #5 { TF } { \@@_if_generic:nTF {#5} @@ -4052,9 +4096,11 @@ % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} -%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/11/15}{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn} +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/11/15} +%<latexrelease> {\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn} %<latexrelease> {Standardise~generic~hook~names} -%<latexrelease>\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn +%<latexrelease>\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn +%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn %<latexrelease> #1 / #2 / #3 / #4 \scan_stop: #5 { TF } %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_if_generic:nTF {#5} @@ -4083,9 +4129,11 @@ % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} -%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01}{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn} +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2021/06/01} +%<latexrelease> {\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn} %<latexrelease> {Support~cmd~hooks} -%<latexrelease>\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn +%<latexrelease>\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn +%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn %<latexrelease> #1 / #2 / #3 / #4 \scan_stop: #5 { TF } %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \tl_if_empty:nTF {#2} @@ -4099,10 +4147,12 @@ %<latexrelease> { \@@_try_put_cmd_hook:n {#5} } %<latexrelease> \@@_make_usable:n {#5} %<latexrelease> } -%<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnTF \c_@@_generics_reversed_ii_prop {#2} +%<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnTF +%<latexrelease> \c_@@_generics_reversed_ii_prop {#2} %<latexrelease> { \tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#5_reversed_tl } { - } } %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnT \c_@@_generics_reversed_iii_prop {#3} +%<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnT +%<latexrelease> \c_@@_generics_reversed_iii_prop {#3} %<latexrelease> { \tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#5_reversed_tl } { - } } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \prg_return_true: @@ -4114,9 +4164,11 @@ % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} -%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}{\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn} +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01} +%<latexrelease> {\@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn} %<latexrelease> {Support~cmd~hooks} -%<latexrelease>\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn +%<latexrelease>\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn +%<latexrelease> \@@_try_declaring_generic_hook:wn %<latexrelease> #1 / #2 / #3 / #4 \scan_stop: #5 { TF } %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \tl_if_empty:nTF {#2} @@ -4125,10 +4177,12 @@ %<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnTF \c_@@_generics_prop {#1} %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_if_declared:nF {#5} { \hook_new:n {#5} } -%<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnTF \c_@@_generics_reversed_ii_prop {#2} +%<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnTF +%<latexrelease> \c_@@_generics_reversed_ii_prop {#2} %<latexrelease> { \tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#5_reversed_tl } { - } } %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnT \c_@@_generics_reversed_iii_prop {#3} +%<latexrelease> \prop_if_in:NnT +%<latexrelease> \c_@@_generics_reversed_iii_prop {#3} %<latexrelease> { \tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#5_reversed_tl } { - } } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \prg_return_true: @@ -4204,11 +4258,11 @@ % \changes{v1.0h}{2021/01/07}{Assume hook name has at least three % nonempty parts (gh/464)} % \begin{macrocode} -%<latexrelease>\cs_new:Npn \@@_strip_double_slash:w #1/#2/#3 // #4 \s_@@_mark +%<latexrelease>\cs_new:Npn \@@_strip_double_slash:w #1/#2/#3//#4\s_@@_mark %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \tl_if_empty:nTF {#4} %<latexrelease> { #1/#2/#3 } -%<latexrelease> { \@@_strip_double_slash:w #1/#2/#3 / #4 \s_@@_mark } +%<latexrelease> { \@@_strip_double_slash:w #1/#2/#3 /#4\s_@@_mark } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease % \end{macrocode} @@ -4287,9 +4341,12 @@ % \begin{macrocode} %<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}{\c_@@_generics_reversed_ii_prop} %<latexrelease> {Standardise~generic~hook~names} -%<latexrelease>\prop_const_from_keyval:Nn \c_@@_generics_reversed_ii_prop {after=,end=} -%<latexrelease>\prop_const_from_keyval:Nn \c_@@_generics_reversed_iii_prop {after=} -%<latexrelease>\prop_const_from_keyval:Nn \c_@@_generics_file_prop {before=,after=} +%<latexrelease>\prop_const_from_keyval:Nn +%<latexrelease> \c_@@_generics_reversed_ii_prop {after=,end=} +%<latexrelease>\prop_const_from_keyval:Nn +%<latexrelease> \c_@@_generics_reversed_iii_prop {after=} +%<latexrelease>\prop_const_from_keyval:Nn +%<latexrelease> \c_@@_generics_file_prop {before=,after=} %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} @@ -4369,7 +4426,8 @@ \str_if_eq:nnTF {#2} { top-level } { \@@_toplevel_gset:nn {#1} { } } { - \prop_gpop:cnNF { g_@@_#1_code_prop } {#2} \l_@@_return_tl + \prop_gpop:cnNF { g_@@_#1_code_prop } + {#2} \l_@@_return_tl { \msg_warning:nnnn { hooks } { cannot-remove } {#1} {#2} } } } @@ -4387,7 +4445,8 @@ \@@_if_deprecated_generic:nTF {#1} { \@@_deprecated_generic_warn:n {#1} - \@@_do_deprecated_generic:Nn \@@_gremove_code:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_do_deprecated_generic:Nn + \@@_gremove_code:nn {#1} {#2} } { \msg_warning:nnnn { hooks } { cannot-remove } {#1} {#2} } } @@ -4412,8 +4471,10 @@ %<latexrelease> \str_if_eq:nnTF {#2} { top-level } %<latexrelease> { \@@_tl_gclear:c { @@_toplevel~#1 } } %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \prop_gpop:cnNF { g_@@_#1_code_prop } {#2} \l_@@_return_tl -%<latexrelease> { \msg_warning:nnnn { hooks } { cannot-remove } {#1} {#2} } +%<latexrelease> \prop_gpop:cnNF { g_@@_#1_code_prop } +%<latexrelease> {#2} \l_@@_return_tl +%<latexrelease> { \msg_warning:nnnn { hooks } { cannot-remove } +%<latexrelease> {#1} {#2} } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \@@_if_usable:nT {#1} @@ -4423,9 +4484,11 @@ %<latexrelease> \@@_if_deprecated_generic:nTF {#1} %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_deprecated_generic_warn:n {#1} -%<latexrelease> \@@_do_deprecated_generic:Nn \@@_gremove_code:nn {#1} {#2} +%<latexrelease> \@@_do_deprecated_generic:Nn +%<latexrelease> \@@_gremove_code:nn {#1} {#2} %<latexrelease> } -%<latexrelease> { \msg_warning:nnnn { hooks } { cannot-remove } {#1} {#2} } +%<latexrelease> { \msg_warning:nnnn { hooks } { cannot-remove } +%<latexrelease> {#1} {#2} } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease @@ -4467,7 +4530,8 @@ {#1} {#2} } \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_cs_gput_right_fast:nnn #1 #2 #3 - { \cs_gset:cpx { @@#1~#2 } { \exp_not:v { @@#1~#2 } \exp_not:n {#3} } } + { \cs_gset:cpx { @@#1~#2 } + { \exp_not:v { @@#1~#2 } \exp_not:n {#3} } } \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_cs_gput_right_slow:nnn #1 #2 #3 { % \end{macrocode} @@ -4693,7 +4757,8 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \exp_last_unbraced:NNf \cs_set:Npn \@@_tmp:w { \@@_parameter:n {#1} } { } - \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_tmpa_tl { \@@_braced_cs_parameter:n { @@_tmp:w } } + \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_tmpa_tl + { \@@_braced_cs_parameter:n { @@_tmp:w } } % \end{macrocode} % Now this function does the fun part. It is meant to be used with % \cs{prop_map_function:NN}, taking a label name in \verb|##1| and the @@ -5069,8 +5134,8 @@ %<latexrelease> \@@_if_deprecated_generic:nT {#1} %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_deprecated_generic_warn:n {#1} -%<latexrelease> \@@_do_deprecated_generic:Nn \@@_gset_rule:nnnn {#1} -%<latexrelease> {#2} {#3} {#4} +%<latexrelease> \@@_do_deprecated_generic:Nn \@@_gset_rule:nnnn +%<latexrelease> {#1} {#2} {#3} {#4} %<latexrelease> \exp_after:wN \use_none:nnnnnnnnn \use_none:n %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \@@_init_structure:n {#1} @@ -5110,7 +5175,8 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_rule_before_gset:nnn #1#2#3 { - \@@_tl_gset:cx { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl } + \@@_tl_gset:cx + { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl } { \@@_label_ordered:nnTF {#2} {#3} { < } { > } } } \cs_new_eq:cN { @@_rule_<_gset:nnn } \@@_rule_before_gset:nnn @@ -5119,7 +5185,8 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_rule_after_gset:nnn #1#2#3 { - \@@_tl_gset:cx { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#3} {#2} _tl } + \@@_tl_gset:cx + { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#3} {#2} _tl } { \@@_label_ordered:nnTF {#3} {#2} { < } { > } } } \cs_new_eq:cN { @@_rule_>_gset:nnn } \@@_rule_after_gset:nnn @@ -5132,7 +5199,8 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_rule_voids_gset:nnn #1#2#3 { - \@@_tl_gset:cx { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl } + \@@_tl_gset:cx + { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl } { \@@_label_ordered:nnTF {#2} {#3} { -> } { <- } } } % \end{macrocode} @@ -5146,11 +5214,15 @@ % together in hook |#1|. % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_rule_incompatible-error_gset:nnn } #1#2#3 - { \@@_tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl } - { xE } } + { \@@_tl_gset:cn + { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl } + { xE } + } \cs_new_protected:cpn { @@_rule_incompatible-warning_gset:nnn } #1#2#3 - { \@@_tl_gset:cn { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl } - { xW } } + { \@@_tl_gset:cn + { g_@@_#1_rule_ \@@_label_pair:nn {#2} {#3} _tl } + { xW } + } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % @@ -5268,7 +5340,7 @@ } % \end{macrocode} % After all hooks are initialized we change the ``use'' to just -% call the hook code and not initialize it (as it was done in the +% call the hook code and not initialize it (as this was already done in the % preamble. % \begin{macrocode} \@@_post_initialization_defs: @@ -5281,7 +5353,8 @@ %<latexrelease> {Hooks~with~args} %<latexrelease>\cs_gset_protected:Npn \@@_initialize_all: %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_update_hook_code:n \@@_initialize_hook_code:n +%<latexrelease> \cs_gset_eq:NN \@@_update_hook_code:n +%<latexrelease> \@@_initialize_hook_code:n %<latexrelease> \@@_debug:n { \prop_gclear:N \g_@@_used_prop } %<latexrelease> \seq_map_inline:Nn \g_@@_all_seq %<latexrelease> { \@@_update_hook_code:n {##1} } @@ -5291,7 +5364,8 @@ %<latexrelease> \prop_map_inline:Nn \g_@@_used_prop %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \iow_term:x -%<latexrelease> { ^^J ~ ##1 ~ -> ~ \cs_replacement_spec:c { @@~##1 } ~ } +%<latexrelease> { ^^J ~ ##1 ~ -> ~ +%<latexrelease> \cs_replacement_spec:c { @@~##1 } ~ } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \cs_gset_eq:NN \hook_use:n \@@_use_initialized:n @@ -5350,8 +5424,10 @@ % after the \verb|_next| and \verb|_toplevel| macros, so that the % arguments passed to the hook are forwarded to them. % \begin{macrocode} - \exp_not:c { @@_toplevel~#1 } \@@_braced_parameter:n {#1} - \exp_not:c { @@_next~#1 } \@@_braced_parameter:n {#1} + \exp_not:c { @@_toplevel~#1 } + \@@_braced_parameter:n {#1} + \exp_not:c { @@_next~#1 } + \@@_braced_parameter:n {#1} } } { @@ -5400,7 +5476,8 @@ %<latexrelease>\cs_gset_protected:Npn \@@_initialize_hook_code:n #1 %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_debug:n -%<latexrelease> { \iow_term:x { ^^J Update~code~for~hook~'#1' \on@line :^^J } } +%<latexrelease> { \iow_term:x { ^^J Update~code~for~hook~'#1' +%<latexrelease> \on@line :^^J } } %<latexrelease> \@@_include_legacy_code_chunk:n {#1} %<latexrelease> \@@_if_usable:nT {#1} %<latexrelease> { @@ -5414,15 +5491,21 @@ %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_if_reversed:nTF {#1} -%<latexrelease> { \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_tl_gput:Nn \@@_tl_gput_left:Nn -%<latexrelease> \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_clist_gput:NV \clist_gput_left:NV } -%<latexrelease> { \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_tl_gput:Nn \@@_tl_gput_right:Nn -%<latexrelease> \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_clist_gput:NV \clist_gput_right:NV } -%<latexrelease> \prop_set_eq:Nc \l_@@_work_prop { g_@@_#1_code_prop } +%<latexrelease> { \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_tl_gput:Nn +%<latexrelease> \@@_tl_gput_left:Nn +%<latexrelease> \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_clist_gput:NV +%<latexrelease> \clist_gput_left:NV } +%<latexrelease> { \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_tl_gput:Nn +%<latexrelease> \@@_tl_gput_right:Nn +%<latexrelease> \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_clist_gput:NV +%<latexrelease> \clist_gput_right:NV } +%<latexrelease> \prop_set_eq:Nc \l_@@_work_prop +%<latexrelease> { g_@@_#1_code_prop } %<latexrelease> \@@_initialize_single:ccn %<latexrelease> { @@~#1 } { g_@@_#1_labels_clist } {#1} %<latexrelease> \@@_debug:n -%<latexrelease> { \exp_args:NNx \prop_gput:Nnn \g_@@_used_prop {#1} { } } +%<latexrelease> { \exp_args:NNx \prop_gput:Nnn \g_@@_used_prop +%<latexrelease> {#1} { } } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } @@ -5621,7 +5704,8 @@ \int_compare:nNnT { \cs:w \@@_tl_csname:n {##1} \cs_end: } = 0 { - \tl_set:cn { \@@_tl_csname:n { \l_@@_rear_tl } } {##1} + \tl_set:cn + { \@@_tl_csname:n { \l_@@_rear_tl } } {##1} \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_rear_tl {##1} } } @@ -5703,42 +5787,50 @@ %<latexrelease> {#3} %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } -%<latexrelease> \@@_debug:n { \@@_debug_label_data:N \l_@@_work_prop } +%<latexrelease> \@@_debug:n +%<latexrelease> { \@@_debug_label_data:N \l_@@_work_prop } %<latexrelease> \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_rear_tl { 0 } %<latexrelease> \tl_set:cn { \@@_tl_csname:n { 0 } } { 0 } %<latexrelease> \seq_map_inline:Nn \l_@@_labels_seq %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \int_compare:nNnT { \cs:w \@@_tl_csname:n {##1} \cs_end: } = 0 -%<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \tl_set:cn { \@@_tl_csname:n { \l_@@_rear_tl } }{##1} -%<latexrelease> \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_rear_tl {##1} -%<latexrelease> } +%<latexrelease> \int_compare:nNnT +%<latexrelease> { \cs:w \@@_tl_csname:n {##1} \cs_end: } = 0 +%<latexrelease> { +%<latexrelease> \tl_set:cn { \@@_tl_csname:n +%<latexrelease> { \l_@@_rear_tl } } {##1} +%<latexrelease> \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_rear_tl {##1} +%<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \tl_set_eq:Nc \l_@@_front_tl { \@@_tl_csname:n { 0 } } %<latexrelease> \@@_tl_gclear:N #1 %<latexrelease> \clist_gclear:N #2 -%<latexrelease> \bool_while_do:nn { ! \str_if_eq_p:Vn \l_@@_front_tl { 0 } } +%<latexrelease> \bool_while_do:nn +%<latexrelease> { ! \str_if_eq_p:Vn \l_@@_front_tl { 0 } } %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \int_decr:N \l_@@_labels_int -%<latexrelease> \prop_get:NVN \l_@@_work_prop \l_@@_front_tl \l_@@_return_tl +%<latexrelease> \prop_get:NVN \l_@@_work_prop +%<latexrelease> \l_@@_front_tl \l_@@_return_tl %<latexrelease> \exp_args:NNV \@@_tl_gput:Nn #1 \l_@@_return_tl %<latexrelease> \@@_clist_gput:NV #2 \l_@@_front_tl -%<latexrelease> \@@_debug:n{ \iow_term:x{Handled~ code~ for~ \l_@@_front_tl} } -%<latexrelease> \seq_map_inline:cn { \@@_seq_csname:n { \l_@@_front_tl } } +%<latexrelease> \@@_debug:n{ \iow_term:x +%<latexrelease> {Handled~ code~ for~ \l_@@_front_tl} } +%<latexrelease> \seq_map_inline:cn +%<latexrelease> { \@@_seq_csname:n { \l_@@_front_tl } } %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \tl_set:cx { \@@_tl_csname:n {##1} } -%<latexrelease> { \int_eval:n -%<latexrelease> { \cs:w \@@_tl_csname:n {##1} \cs_end: - 1 } -%<latexrelease> } +%<latexrelease> { \int_eval:n +%<latexrelease> { \cs:w \@@_tl_csname:n {##1} \cs_end: - 1 } +%<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \int_compare:nNnT -%<latexrelease> { \cs:w \@@_tl_csname:n {##1} \cs_end: } = 0 -%<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \tl_set:cn { \@@_tl_csname:n { \l_@@_rear_tl } } {##1} -%<latexrelease> \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_rear_tl {##1} -%<latexrelease> } +%<latexrelease> { \cs:w \@@_tl_csname:n {##1} \cs_end: } = 0 +%<latexrelease> { +%<latexrelease> \tl_set:cn { \@@_tl_csname:n +%<latexrelease> { \l_@@_rear_tl } } {##1} +%<latexrelease> \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_rear_tl {##1} +%<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \tl_set_eq:Nc \l_@@_front_tl -%<latexrelease> { \@@_tl_csname:n { \l_@@_front_tl } } +%<latexrelease> { \@@_tl_csname:n { \l_@@_front_tl } } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \int_compare:nNnF \l_@@_labels_int = 0 %<latexrelease> { @@ -5747,7 +5839,8 @@ %<latexrelease> \@@_debug_label_data:N \l_@@_work_prop %<latexrelease> \iow_term:x{====================} %<latexrelease> } -%<latexrelease> \exp_args:NNo \@@_tl_gput:Nn #1 { \cs:w @@_toplevel~#3 \cs_end: } +%<latexrelease> \exp_args:NNo \@@_tl_gput:Nn #1 +%<latexrelease> { \cs:w @@_toplevel~#3 \cs_end: } %<latexrelease> \@@_tl_gput_right:No #1 { \cs:w @@_next~#3 \cs_end: } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease>\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_tl_gput_right:Nn { No } @@ -6008,6 +6101,8 @@ % % \changes{v1.1a}{2023/04/06} % {Changes to add hook arguments (hook-args).} +% \changes{v1.1g}{2024/01/03} +% {Fix expansion of \cs{@@_print_args:nn} argument (gh/1221).} % \begin{macrocode} %<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2023/06/01}{\@@_log:nN} %<latexrelease> {Hooks~with~args} @@ -6027,7 +6122,7 @@ hook~'#1' \@@_if_disabled:nF {#1} { - \exp_args:Nf \@@_print_args:nn {#1} + \exp_args:Nne \@@_print_args:nn {#1} { \int_eval:n { \str_count:e { \@@_parameter:n {#1} } / 3 } @@ -6164,7 +6259,8 @@ %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \@@_preamble_hook:n {#1} %<latexrelease> \@@_log_cmd:x -%<latexrelease> { ^^J ->~The~ \@@_if_generic:nT {#1} { generic~ } hook~'#1': } +%<latexrelease> { ^^J ->~The~ \@@_if_generic:nT +%<latexrelease> {#1} { generic~ } hook~'#1': } %<latexrelease> \@@_if_usable:nF {#1} %<latexrelease> { \@@_log_line:x { The~hook~is~not~declared. } } %<latexrelease> \@@_if_disabled:nT {#1} @@ -6177,26 +6273,30 @@ %<latexrelease> { \@@_log_line_indent:x { --- } } %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \prop_map_inline:cn { g_@@_#1_code_prop } -%<latexrelease> { \@@_log_line_indent:x { ##1~->~\tl_to_str:n {##2} } } +%<latexrelease> { \@@_log_line_indent:x +%<latexrelease> { ##1~->~\tl_to_str:n {##2} } } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \@@_log_line:x %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> Document-level~(top-level)~code %<latexrelease> \@@_if_usable:nT {#1} -%<latexrelease> { ~(executed~\@@_if_reversed:nTF {#1} {first} {last} ) } : +%<latexrelease> { ~(executed~ +%<latexrelease> \@@_if_reversed:nTF {#1} {first} {last} ) } : %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \@@_log_line_indent:x %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \tl_if_empty:cTF { @@_toplevel~#1 } %<latexrelease> { --- } -%<latexrelease> { -> ~ \exp_args:Nv \tl_to_str:n { @@_toplevel~#1 } } +%<latexrelease> { -> ~ \exp_args:Nv \tl_to_str:n +%<latexrelease> { @@_toplevel~#1 } } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \@@_log_line:x { Extra~code~for~next~invocation: } %<latexrelease> \@@_log_line_indent:x %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \tl_if_empty:cTF { @@_next~#1 } %<latexrelease> { --- } -%<latexrelease> { ->~ \exp_args:Nv \@@_log_next_code:n { @@_next~#1 } } +%<latexrelease> { ->~ \exp_args:Nv \@@_log_next_code:n +%<latexrelease> { @@_next~#1 } } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> \@@_log_line:x { Rules: } %<latexrelease> \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_tmpa_bool @@ -6220,7 +6320,8 @@ %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> Execution~order %<latexrelease> \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_tmpa_bool -%<latexrelease> { \@@_if_reversed:nT {#1} { ~(after~reversal) } } +%<latexrelease> { \@@_if_reversed:nT +%<latexrelease> {#1}{ ~(after~reversal) } } %<latexrelease> { ~(after~ %<latexrelease> \@@_if_reversed:nT {#1} { reversal~and~ } %<latexrelease> applying~rules) @@ -6231,16 +6332,19 @@ %<latexrelease> \@spaces %<latexrelease> \clist_if_empty:cTF { g_@@_#1_labels_clist } %<latexrelease> { --- } -%<latexrelease> { \clist_use:cn { g_@@_#1_labels_clist } { ,~ } } +%<latexrelease> { \clist_use:cn +%<latexrelease> { g_@@_#1_labels_clist } { ,~ } } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_log_line:x { Execution~order: } %<latexrelease> #2 %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \@spaces Not~set~because~the~hook~ \@@_if_usable:nTF {#1} +%<latexrelease> \@spaces Not~set~because~the~hook~ +%<latexrelease> \@@_if_usable:nTF {#1} %<latexrelease> { code~pool~is~empty } -%<latexrelease> { is~\@@_if_disabled:nTF {#1} {disabled} {undeclared} } +%<latexrelease> { is~\@@_if_disabled:nTF +%<latexrelease> {#1} {disabled} {undeclared} } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } @@ -6388,7 +6492,8 @@ %<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2020/10/01}{\hook_gput_next_code:nn} %<latexrelease> {Hooks~with~args} %<latexrelease>\cs_gset_protected:Npn \hook_gput_next_code:nn #1 -%<latexrelease> { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_gput_next_code:nn {#1} } +%<latexrelease> { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn +%<latexrelease> \@@_gput_next_code:nn {#1} } %<latexrelease>\cs_gset_protected:Npn \hook_gput_next_code_with_args:nn #1 #2 { } %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease % \end{macrocode} @@ -6580,7 +6685,8 @@ %<latexrelease> \fi: %<latexrelease> \cs:w @@~#1 \@@_use_end: %<latexrelease> } -%<latexrelease>\cs_new:Npn \@@_use_undefined:w #1 #2 @@~#3 \@@_use_end: +%<latexrelease>\cs_new:Npn \@@_use_undefined:w +%<latexrelease> #1 #2 @@~#3 \@@_use_end: %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> #1 % fi %<latexrelease> \@@_use:wn #3 / \s_@@_mark {#3} @@ -6680,15 +6786,18 @@ % % \changes{v1.0s}{2021/09/28} % {Correct usage of older \cs{@@_if_file_hook:wTF} (gh/675)} +% \changes{v1.1h}{2024/01/24} +% {Correct usage of older \cs{@@_if_file_hook:wTF} (gh/1243)} % \begin{macrocode} %<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_try_file_hook:n #1 %<latexrelease> { -%<latexrelease> \@@_if_file_hook:wTF #1 / \s_@@_mark +%<latexrelease> \@@_if_file_hook:wTF #1 / / \s_@@_mark %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \exp_args:Ne \@@_if_usable_use:n %<latexrelease> { \exp_args:Ne \@@_file_hook_normalize:n {#1} } %<latexrelease> } -%<latexrelease> { \@@_if_usable_use:n {#1} } % file/ generic hook (e.g. file/before) +%<latexrelease> { \@@_if_usable_use:n {#1} } +%<latexrelease> % file/ generic hook (e.g. file/before) %<latexrelease> } % \end{macrocode} % @@ -6726,12 +6835,14 @@ \cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_use_once:n #1 { \@@_if_execute_immediately:nF {#1} - { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_use_once:nn { \use:n {#1} } { 0 } } + { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_use_once:nn + { \use:n {#1} } { 0 } } } \cs_new_protected:Npn \hook_use_once:nnw #1 #2 { \@@_if_execute_immediately:nF {#1} - { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_use_once:nn { \use:n {#1} } {#2} } + { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_use_once:nn + { \use:n {#1} } {#2} } } %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease % \end{macrocode} @@ -6743,7 +6854,8 @@ %<latexrelease>\cs_gset_protected:Npn \hook_use_once:n #1 %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \@@_if_execute_immediately:nF {#1} -%<latexrelease> { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_use_once:n { \use:n {#1} } } +%<latexrelease> { \@@_normalize_hook_args:Nn \@@_use_once:n +%<latexrelease> { \use:n {#1} } } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease>\cs_gset:Npn \hook_use_once:nnw #1 #2 %<latexrelease> { \use:c { use_none: \prg_replicate:nn {#2} { n } } } @@ -6768,7 +6880,8 @@ % along with the next execution code. % \begin{macrocode} \@@_replacing_args_false: - \@@_cs_gput_right:nnn { _next } {#1} { \@@_use_once_clear:n {#1} } + \@@_cs_gput_right:nnn { _next } {#1} + { \@@_use_once_clear:n {#1} } \@@_replacing_args_reset: \@@_if_usable:nTF {#1} { \@@_use_initialized:n {#1} } @@ -7215,7 +7328,8 @@ { Cannot~add~code~to~disabled~hook~'#1'. } { The~hook~'#1'~you~tried~to~add~code~to~was~previously~disabled~ - with~\iow_char:N\\hook_disable_generic:n~or~\iow_char:N\\DisableGenericHook,~so~ + with~\iow_char:N\\hook_disable_generic:n~or~ + \iow_char:N\\DisableGenericHook,~so~ it~cannot~have~code~added~to~it. } % \end{macrocode} @@ -7383,7 +7497,7 @@ %<latexrelease> {Hooks~with~args} %<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \NewHookWithArguments #1 #2 { } %<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \NewReversedHookWithArguments #1 #2 { } -%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \NewMirroredHookPairWithArguments #1 #2 #3 { } +%<latexrelease>\cs_new_protected:Npn \NewMirroredHookPairWithArguments #1 #2 #3{} %<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} @@ -7835,7 +7949,8 @@ %<latexrelease> \exp_args:No \exp_not:o %<latexrelease> { %<latexrelease> \cs:w @@#1~#2 \exp_last_unbraced:Ne \cs_end: -%<latexrelease> { \@@_braced_cs_parameter:n { @@#1~#2 } } +%<latexrelease> { \@@_braced_cs_parameter:n +%<latexrelease> { @@#1~#2 } } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } %<latexrelease> } diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltkeys.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltkeys.dtx index da8340ea9d0..34a0ab4b477 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltkeys.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltkeys.dtx @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ % \texttt{second-name} can be given anywhere, and will save its value in % \cs{@mypkg@other@name}. % -% Keys created \emph{before} the use of \cs{ProcessKeyOptions}act as +% Keys created \emph{before} the use of \cs{ProcessKeyOptions} act as % package options. % \end{function} % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx index c310ac8ecff..a15019dcd55 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx @@ -23,16 +23,22 @@ %<tex> \ProvidesFile\undefined\begingroup\def\ProvidesFile %<tex> #1#2[#3]{\endgroup\immediate\write-1{File: #1 #3}} %<tex>\fi -%<plain>\ProvidesFile{ltluatex.tex}% -%<*driver> +%<*dtx> \ProvidesFile{ltluatex.dtx} -%</driver> -%<*tex> -[2023/08/03 v1.2c -%</tex> -%<plain> LuaTeX support for plain TeX (core) -%<*tex> +%</dtx> +%<plain>\ProvidesFile{ltluatex.tex} +%<*plain> +% \fi +% \ProvidesFile{ltluatex.dtx} +[2024/02/11 v1.2c +% LaTeX Kernel (LuaTeX support)^^A +%\iffalse +%<plain> LuaTeX support for plain TeX (core)% +%\fi ] +% \iffalse +%</plain> +%<*tex> \edef\etatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} \catcode`\@=11 %</tex> @@ -541,9 +547,9 @@ \csname globbox\endcsname % \end{macrocode} % -% Define|\e@alloc| as in latex (the existing macros in |etex.src| +% Define|\e@alloc| as in \LaTeX{} (the existing macros in |etex.src| are % hard to extend to further register types as they assume specific -% 26x and 27x count range. For compatibility the existing register +% 26x and 27x count range). For compatibility the existing register % allocation is not changed. % % \begin{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmarks.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmarks.dtx index f8268564841..a9f3bb0184f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmarks.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmarks.dtx @@ -14,21 +14,14 @@ % %%% From File: ltmarks.dtx % -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ltmarksversion{v1.0d} -\def\ltmarksdate{2022/06/01} -% \end{macrocode} %<*driver> +% \fi +\ProvidesFile{ltmarks.dtx} + [2024/05/31 v1.0g LaTeX Kernel (Marks)] +% \iffalse +% \documentclass{l3doc} - -%\usepackage{ltmarks} - -% Fixing footnotes in functions and variables: this should be in l3doc! - -\newcommand\fixfootnote[2]{\footnotemark - \AddToHookNext{env/#1/after}{\footnotetext{#2}}} -\AddToHook{env/function/begin}{\def\footnote{\fixfootnote{function}}} -\AddToHook{env/variable/begin}{\def\footnote{\fixfootnote{variable}}} +\GetFileInfo{ltmarks.dtx} \EnableCrossrefs \CodelineIndex @@ -45,7 +38,7 @@ % % % \title{The \texttt{ltmarks.dtx} code\thanks{This file has version -% \ltmarksversion\ dated \ltmarksdate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ +% \fileversion\ dated \filedate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ % Project.}} % \author{^^A % Frank Mittelbach, \LaTeX{} Project\thanks @@ -156,7 +149,7 @@ % \begin{function}{\InsertMark,\mark_insert:nn} % \begin{syntax} % \cs{InsertMark} \Arg{class} \Arg{text} -% \cs{mark_insert:nn} \Arg{class} \Arg{text} +% \cs{mark_insert:nn} \Arg{class} \Arg{text} % \end{syntax} % Adds a mark to the current galley for the \meta{class}, containing the % \meta{text}. @@ -291,6 +284,11 @@ % The \meta{pos\textsubscript{\itshape i}} argument can be either % \texttt{top}, \texttt{first}, or \texttt{last}. % +% Important to note is that the comparison is not with respect to +% the textual content of the marks but whether or not they +% originated from the same \cs{InsertMark} command (or the L3 layer +% version \cs{mark_insert:nn}). +% % If you wish to compare marks across different regions or across % different classes, you have to do it using the generic test only % available in the L3 programming layer or do it manually, i.e., @@ -299,6 +297,8 @@ % \emph{true}; if a declared and an undeclared mark class is used % it is always \emph{false}.} % +% \subsection{Use cases for conditionals} +% % However, the basic version is enough for the following typical use cases: % \begin{description} % \item[Test for at most one mark of class \texttt{myclass} on current @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ % \begin{function}{\DebugMarksOn,\DebugMarksOff, % \mark_debug_on:,\mark_debug_off:} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{DebugMarksOn} ... \cs{DebugMarksOff} +% \cs{DebugMarksOn} \ldots\ \cs{DebugMarksOff} % \end{syntax} % % Commands to turn the debugging of mark code on or off. The @@ -397,8 +397,8 @@ % % \begin{function}{\markboth, \markright} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{markboth} \Arg{left} \Arg{right} -% \cs{markright} \Arg{right} +% \cs{markboth} \Arg{left} \Arg{right} +% \cs{markright} \Arg{right} % \end{syntax} % \LaTeXe{} uses two marks which aren't fully independent. A % \enquote{left} mark generated by the first argument of \cs{markboth} @@ -610,9 +610,9 @@ % marks. It too is called as part of \cs{@opcol}. % \end{function} % -% \begin{function}{\@@_update_structure:nn} +% \begin{function}{\@@_update_structure_from_material:nn} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{@@_update_structure:nn} \Arg{region} \Arg{material with marks} +% \cs{@@_update_structure_from_material:nn} \Arg{region} \Arg{material with marks} % \end{syntax} % Helper function that inspects the marks % inside the second argument and assigns new mark values based on @@ -627,8 +627,8 @@ % \texttt{page} and \texttt{column} because only they have % \texttt{previous-...} counterparts. % -% Another important part to keep in mind is that marks are only -% recognized if they appear on top-level, e.g., if we want to +% Another important aspect to keep in mind is that marks are recognized +% only if they appear on the top level, e.g., if we want to % process material stored in boxes we need to put it unboxed (using % \cs{unvcopy} etc.)\ into the second argument. % \end{function} @@ -642,7 +642,7 @@ % Helper function that copies all mark values in the \meta{source} % region to \meta{alias}, i.e., make the structures identical. Used % to update the \texttt{previous-...} structures inside -% \cs{@@_update_structure:nn} and \texttt{first-column} and +% \cs{@@_update_structure_from_material:nn} and \texttt{first-column} and % \texttt{last-column} structures inside % \cs{@@_update_singlecol_structures:} or % \cs{@@_update_dblcol_structures:}. @@ -650,7 +650,6 @@ % % % -% % \begin{function}{\@@_update_structure_to_err:n} % \begin{syntax} % \cs{@@_update_structure_to_err:n} \Arg{region} @@ -662,6 +661,37 @@ % \end{function} % % +% \begin{function}{\@@_get_marks_for_reinsertion:nNN} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{@@_get_marks_for_reinsertion:nNN} \Arg{source} +% \qquad \meta{token-list-var for collecting first marks} +% \qquad \meta{token-list-var for collecting last marks} +% \end{syntax} +% Helper function for extracting marks that would otherwise get +% lost, for example when they are hidden inside a box. This helper +% does not update mark structures and can therefore be used outside +% the output routine as well. +% +% It collect all the top-level marks from inside the \meta{source} +% and adds suitable \cs{mark_insert:nn} in the two token +% lists. These token lists can then be executed at the right place +% to reinsert the marks, e.g., directly after the box. This is, for +% example, used by \pkg{multicol} when a short balanced +% \env{multicols} is returned to the galley for typesetting. +% +% If the \meta{source} consists of a single vertical box (plus +% possibly followed by some glue but nothing else) then the box is +% unpacked and the top-level marks are collected from its +% content. However, if it is not a vertical box or there are are +% other data then nothing is unpacked and you have to do the +% unpacking yourself to get at the marks inside. +% +% It is quite likely that one only needs a single token list for +% returning the \cs{mark_insert:nn} statements. If that is the case +% this command may change to take only two arguments. +% \end{function} +% +% % % ^^A \end{documentation} % @@ -703,12 +733,13 @@ % % % \begin{macro}{\mark_new_class:n,\@@_new_class:nn} +% % A mark class is created by initializing a number of data -% structures. First, we get a register number to refer to the mark class. -% The new mark class is then added to the \cs{g_@@_classes_seq} -% sequence to be able to easily loop over all classes. Finally a -% number of top-level global token lists are declared that hold -% various versions of the mark for access. +% structures. First, we get a register number to refer to the mark +% class. The new mark class is then added to the +% \cs{g_@@_classes_seq} sequence to be able to easily loop over all +% classes. Finally a number of top-level global token lists are +% declared that hold various versions of the mark for access. % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \mark_new_class:n #1 { @@ -774,6 +805,32 @@ \tl_new:c { g_@@_last-column_top_ #1 _tl } \tl_new:c { g_@@_last-column_first_ #1 _tl } \tl_new:c { g_@@_last-column_last_ #1 _tl } +% \end{macrocode} +% All marks will have an identication at the beginning of the form +% \cs{@@_id:n}\texttt\{\meta{number}\texttt\} and therefore the +% initial empty values should have that too, so that data extraction +% is going to be uniform. +% \changes{v1.0g}{2024/05/31}{Initialize all marks with an id, use 0 +% when a new class is made (gh/1359)} +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_page_top_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_page_first_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_page_last_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_previous-page_top_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_previous-page_first_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_previous-page_last_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_column_top_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_column_first_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_column_last_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_previous-column_top_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_previous-column_first_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_previous-column_last_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_first-column_top_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_first-column_first_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_first-column_last_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_last-column_top_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_last-column_first_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } + \tl_set:cn { g_@@_last-column_last_ #1 _tl }{ \@@_id:n{0} } } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} @@ -784,57 +841,74 @@ % \subsection{Updating mark structures} % % -% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_box,\g_@@_tmp_tl,\g_@@_new_top_tl} -% For some operations we need a temporary private box and two +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_box,\l_@@_ii_box,\g_@@_tmp_tl,\g_@@_new_top_tl} +% For some operations we need two temporary private boxes and two % private global token lists. % \begin{macrocode} \box_new:N \l_@@_box +\box_new:N \l_@@_ii_box \tl_new:N \g_@@_tmp_tl \tl_new:N \g_@@_new_top_tl % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % -% \begin{macro}{\@@_update_structure:nn} -% -% This function updates the mark structures. The first argument is -% the region to update and second argument receives the material -% that holds the marks. Out of this material we extract the first -% and last marks for all classes (if there are any) to do the -% assignments. % +% \begin{macro}{\@@_extract_and_handle_marks:nn} +% \changes{v1.0e}{2024/01/29}{Macro added} +% +% This is the main macro to extract and handle marks inside some +% vertical material. It is used by +% \cs{@@_update_structure_from_material:nn} (for updating the mark +% structure for a region based on the marks found) and by +% \cs{@@_get_marks_for_reinsertion:nNN} (for extracting marks from +% some material and prepare for reinserting them later (e.g., out +% of a box that is placed as a box into the main galley). % \begin{macrocode} -\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_update_structure:nn #1#2 - { +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_extract_and_handle_marks:nn #1#2 { % \end{macrocode} -% First thing we do is copying the current structure to -% \texttt{previous-...}; this leaves the current structure -% untouched so we can update it class by class (which is necessary). +% This macro expects code to handle extracted marks in its first argument and +% vertical material (not boxed or just consisting of a single +% vertical box) as its second. It +% extracts top-level mark information from \verb/#2/, stores them +% as split marks and then calls +% \verb/#1/ to make use of this information. +% +% If it finds a forced break in the material it removes it and then +% restarts the attempt without it. +% +% We start with a group to keep most changes local. % \begin{macrocode} - \@@_update_structure_alias:nn { previous-#1 } {#1} + \group_begin: % \end{macrocode} +% % Getting the first and last marks out of the material in \verb=#2= -% is done by putting the material in a box and then doing a -% split operation to the maximum size possible (which hopefully -% means all of the content).\footnote{We could verify this, maybe we -% should.} Because this is an action only for the sake of getting -% at the mark values we don't want any underfull -% box warnings so we turn those (locally) off. +% is done by putting the material in a box and then doing a split +% operation to the maximum size possible (which hopefully gets us +% all of the content).\footnote{With normal column material cut +% from the main galley we should always get all material in one go, +% but in certain situations, for example, in a \pkg{multicols} +% environment that contains some \cs{columnbreak}s a single split +% operation will not be enough. Thus, this is something we need to +% handle.} Because this action is used only to get the mark +% values, we don't want any underfull box warnings so we (locally) +% turn those off. +% % \begin{macrocode} - \group_begin: \dim_set_eq:NN \tex_splitmaxdepth:D \c_max_dim \int_set_eq:NN \tex_vbadness:D \c_max_int \dim_set_eq:NN \tex_vfuzz:D \c_max_dim % \end{macrocode} -% There is a further complication: if the region contains infinite +% +% There is a further complication: if the material contains infinite % shrinking glue then a \tn{vsplit} operation will balk with a -% low-level error. Now pages or columns, which are our main concern here, can't -% have such infinite shrinkage if they are cut straight from the -% galley, however the use of \tn{enlargethispage} actually does add -% some at the very bottom (and also wraps the whole page into a box -% by itself, so if we leave it this way then a) we get this error -% and b) we don't see any marks because they are hidden one level -% down). +% low-level error. Now pages or columns, which are our main concern +% here, can't have such infinite shrinkage if they are cut straight +% from the galley, however the use of \tn{enlargethispage} actually +% does add some at the very bottom (and also wraps the whole page +% into a box by itself, so if we leave it this way then a) we get +% this error and b) we don't see any marks because they are hidden +% one level down). % % Another possible issue are packages or user code that place stray % \tn{vbox}es directly into the main galley (an example is @@ -842,93 +916,236 @@ % boxes end up as the last item on the page we should not unpack % them. % -% We therefore do an \tn{unskip} to get rid of that glue if present and -% also check if we have then a \tn{vbox} as the last item and if so -% unpack that too, but only under certain conditions, see -% below. All this is temporary, just for getting the -% marks out, so it doesn't affect the final page production. -% -% In fact, we go one step further and set the box to a large -% negative height possible and afterwards take a look at the -% reported badness: if it is zero we know that there has still been -% infinite shrinkage in the box so that we can't do a -% \tn{vsplit}. If that is the case we generate an error message and -% bypass extracting the marks. We use only half of \cs{c_max_dim} -% because otherwise \TeX{} will report an overfull vbox despite our -% setting of \cs{tex_vfuzz:D}. This test will not find existing -% infinite shrinkage in all cases, e.g., if there are several glues -% that cancel each other, but it is the best we can do. -% \begin{macrocode} - \vbox_set_to_ht:Nnn \l_@@_box { -.5\c_max_dim } - { - #2 - \tex_unskip:D - \box_set_to_last:N \l_@@_box +% All these issues need to be handled, which is done in +% \cs{@@_prepare_and_extract:nn}. +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_prepare_and_extract:nn {#1} {#2} +% \end{macrocode} +% Once all mark classes have been processed, the data structures are +% updated and we can close the group, which undoes our local +% changes and retains only the global ones. +% \begin{macrocode} + \group_end: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_prepare_and_extract:nn} +% +% This macro does the dirty work. It is not directly integrated in +% \cs{@@_extract_and_handle_marks:nn} because we may have to call +% it recursively if we find forced breaks. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_prepare_and_extract:nn #1#2 { +% \end{macrocode} +% +% To handle the \cs{enlargethispage} case we do an \tn{unskip} to +% get rid of any glue that is present at the very end of the material +% and also check if we have then a \tn{vbox} as the last item and +% if so unpack that too, but only under certain conditions, see +% below. All this is temporary done in a group, just for getting +% the marks out, so it doesn't affect the final page production. +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \vbox_set:Nn \l_@@_box + { + #2 + \tex_unskip:D + \box_set_to_last:N \l_@@_box % \end{macrocode} % After having removed the last box from the current list (if there -% was one) -% we check if the list is now empty. If not, the the last box is -% definitely not the one from \tn{enlargethispage} and so we can -% and should leave it alone. Otherwise we check if this last box is -% a \tn{vbox}. +% was one) we check whether the vertical list is now empty. If not, +% then the last box is definitely not the one from +% \tn{enlargethispage} and so we can, and should, leave it +% alone. Otherwise we check if this last box is a \tn{vbox}. % \changes{v1.0d}{2022/06/01}{Extend the logic for detecting the marks % in the box (gh/836)} % \begin{macrocode} - \int_compare:nNnT \tex_lastnodetype:D < 0 - { - \box_if_vertical:NT \l_@@_box - { -% \end{macrocode} -% If it is we do a further test and reset the \cs{l_@@_box} -% to check if it contains infinitely shrinkable glue. -% \begin{macrocode} - \vbox_set_to_ht:Nnn \l_@@_box { -.5\c_max_dim } - { - \vbox_unpack:N \l_@@_box - \tex_kern:D \c_zero_dim % ensure that box - % is not empty - } + \int_compare:nNnT \tex_lastnodetype:D < 0 + { + \box_if_vertical:NT \l_@@_box % \end{macrocode} -% If not, then we unpack it, if yes we still ignore it for the process of -% mark extraction. We do not generate an error though, because in all -% likelihood this is an ordinary box like a marginal that does -% contain something like \tn{vss}. +% If it is, we unpack the box. % \begin{macrocode} - \int_compare:nNnT \tex_badness:D > 0 - { \vbox_unpack:N \l_@@_box } - } - } + { \vbox_unpack:N \l_@@_box } + } % \end{macrocode} % If it wasn't a vbox, it was either an hbox or there was no box. % Given that we are only interested in the marks we don't need put -% it back in that case. However, we have to make sure that the -% outer box under construction -% is not totally empty (which it might have been from the start, or -% now), because \TeX{} does not report a badness for empty boxes -% and that means our test would incorrectly conclude that we have -% infinite shrinking glue. A simple \tn{kern} is enough to avoid -% this (the same was already done above). -% \begin{macrocode} - \tex_kern:D \c_zero_dim - } - \int_compare:nNnTF \tex_badness:D > 0 +% it back in that case. +% \begin{macrocode} + } % \end{macrocode} -% If the box had no infinite shrinkage (or rather if our test -% didn't show any) we vsplit it. Note that it -% doesn't matter that we set it to this strange size first. If there -% was infinite shrinkage after all, we end up with a low-level -% \TeX{} error, but if there is, it is a coding error and needs -% correcting. +% We are now ready to \cs{vsplit} the box to get at the marks. If +% the box contains some infinite negative glue the \TeX{} will +% produce an error complaining about it but it will correctly find +% the the split marks. Given that we can't prevent that error, we +% hide it from the user and ensure that \TeX{} doesn't stop. The +% error message still shows in the log, but even that is mitigated +% as best as possible---see the definition of +% \cs{@@_vbox_set_split_to_maxdimen:NN} for the tricks employed. % \begin{macrocode} - { - \vbox_set_split_to_ht:NNn \l_@@_box \l_@@_box \c_max_dim + \@@_vbox_set_split_to_maxdimen:NN \l_@@_ii_box \l_@@_box +% \end{macrocode} +% After splitting we check if there is anything left in +% \cs{l_@@_box}. If not then the above split has set some split marks +% that we can then use to finish the extraction: +% \begin{macrocode} + \box_if_empty:NTF \l_@@_box + { #1 } +% \end{macrocode} +% If we have a remainder after the split then this means that there +% was some forced break in the material. We get rid of that by +% combining the content of the two boxes and restart. +% \begin{macrocode} + { +%<*trace> + \@@_debug:n { \iow_term:x + { Marks:~ mark~ extraction~needs~ recursion~ + \msg_line_context: } } +%</trace> + \@@_prepare_and_extract:nn {#1} + { \vbox_unpack:N \l_@@_ii_box + \vbox_unpack:N \l_@@_box } + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_vbox_set_split_to_maxdimen:NN} +% +% Split a box to get at its marks without pausing even if \TeX{} is +% producing an error message because of infinite negative glue in +% the box. If there is such an error we ensure that it only shows +% up in the log but not on the terminal. +% +% The nice low-level hack by DPC records in the \texttt{.log} that a glue +% shrinkage error is harmless. +% +% We disguise \cs{c_max_dim} in an odd looking csname, which then +% shows up as part of the display of an error message if that error +% happens. This csname forms part of the error diplay so what +% you get is something like +%\begin{verbatim} +% ! Infinite glue shrinkage found in box being split. +% <argument> Infinite shrink error above ignored ! +% l. ... } +%\end{verbatim} +% which hopefully makes it clear that the error is harmless and +% and should be ignored by the reader of the \texttt{.log}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_set_eq:cN {Infinite~shrink~error~above~ignored~!}\c_max_dim +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The whole definition of \cs{@@_vbox_set_split_to_maxdimen:NN} +% below is fully expanded, so we have to use a lot of +% \cs{exp_not:N} commands to prevent expansion where necessary. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npx \@@_vbox_set_split_to_maxdimen:NN #1#2 { +% \end{macrocode} +% We start by saving the current interaction and escape char settings. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set:Ne \exp_not:N \l_@@_saved_parameters_tl + { + \tex_interactionmode:D + \exp_not:N \int_use:N \tex_interactionmode:D \scan_stop: + \tex_escapechar:D + \exp_not:N \int_use:N \tex_escapechar:D \scan_stop: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we change them so that no escape char is printed in the +% error message (accounts for the missing backslash in front of +% \verb/Infinite shrink .../) and we set the interaction to +% \cs{nonstopmode} so that the the error (if any) just goes into +% the \texttt{.log} file and \TeX{} doesn't stop at that point. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tex_escapechar:D -1 \scan_stop: + \tex_interactionmode:D 0 \scan_stop: +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we do the splitting of the box to \cs{c_max_dim} to get at +% the marks. This may generate the error we are worried about, +% i.e., if the box contains infinite negative glue. However, \TeX{} +% makes this glue finite and continues, which means we get our split +% marks which is really all we care about. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tex_setbox:D #1 \tex_vsplit:D #2 to +% \end{macrocode} +% The \cs{use:n} may seem pointless, and it is to some extent, but +% we need it to get our disguised \cs{c_max_dim} displayed +% properly as part of the error message if there is one. Without +% it, the display would show only part of what we want it to show +% (try it). +% \begin{macrocode} + \exp_not:N \use:n { + \use:c{Infinite~shrink~error~above~ignored~!} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Finally, we change the escape char and the interaction mode back +% to what it was before: +% \begin{macrocode} + \exp_not:N \l_@@_saved_parameters_tl +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_saved_parameters_tl} +% The temporary variable used for resetting escape char and +% interaction mode. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_saved_parameters_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_update_structure_from_material:nn} +% +% \changes{v1.0e}{2024/01/29}{Macro renamed} +% +% This function updates the mark structures of a region. The first +% argument is the region to update and second argument receives the +% material that holds the marks. Out of this material we extract +% the first and last marks for all classes (if there are any) to do +% the assignments. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_update_structure_from_material:nn #1#2 { + \@@_extract_and_handle_marks:nn +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Once the marks can be extracted we update the structure from the +% split marks (code in \cs{@@_update_structure_from_splitmarks:n}). +% \begin{macrocode} + { \@@_update_structure_from_splitmarks:n {#1} } + { #2 } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_update_structure_from_splitmarks:n} +% This macro is called after we have done a \cs{tex_vsplit:D} +% operation and the mark data is in the split marks. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_update_structure_from_splitmarks:n #1 { +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The first thing we do is to copy the current region structure to +% \texttt{previous-...}; this leaves the current structure +% untouched so we can update it class by class (which is necessary). +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_update_structure_alias:nn { previous-#1 } {#1} % \end{macrocode} % After this action we can get first and last marks of the various % classes through \cs{tex_splitfirstmarks:D} and % \cs{tex_splitbotmarks:D}. So now we loop over all classes stored in % \cs{g_@@_classes_seq}. % \begin{macrocode} - \seq_map_inline:Nn \g_@@_classes_seq + \seq_map_inline:Nn \g_@@_classes_seq { % \end{macrocode} % First action: get the last mark from the previous region, i.e., @@ -950,14 +1167,14 @@ \tl_gset:No \g_@@_tmp_tl { \tex_splitbotmarks:D \use:c { c_@@_class_##1_mark } } % \end{macrocode} -% If this mark doesn't exist then obviously first mark does -% neither, so both become the last mark from the previous region. We +% If this mark doesn't exist then obviously neither does the first mark, +% so both become the last mark from the previous region. We % have to be a little careful here: something like % \verb=\mark_insert:nn{foo}{}= adds an \enquote{empty} mark that should % not be confused with no mark at all. But no mark in our material % will result in \cs{g_@@_tmp_tl} being fully empty. This is why we % have to make sure that \enquote{empty} from \cs{mark_insert:nn} only -% appears to be empty but fails the next test (see below how this +% appears to be empty when typeset but fails the next test (see below how this % is done). % \begin{macrocode} \tl_if_empty:NTF \g_@@_tmp_tl @@ -987,29 +1204,144 @@ } } } - } +} % \end{macrocode} -% If the badness was zero (we actually tested for${}>0$ but it -% can't get negative) then we had infinite shrinkage, so we report -% that and set all marks to the value the last mark had before. +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_get_marks_for_reinsertion:nNN} +% +% This function extracts the marks from the material in the first +% argument but it does not update any the mark structures. Instead, +% it collects the marks in the token lists given as the second and +% third argument, in such a way that they can be reinserted by just +% executing the token lists.\footnote{It is probably enough to +% collect everything in a single token list as long as we put the +% first marks first and the last marks last). But for extra +% flexibility, I currently use 2 token lists. This might change when it is +% really clear that this is never needed.} +% % \begin{macrocode} - { - \msg_error:nnn { mark } { infinite-shrinkage } {#1} - \seq_map_inline:Nn \g_@@_classes_seq +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_get_marks_for_reinsertion:nNN #1#2#3 { +% \end{macrocode} +% First we clear the temporary token lists as we haven't seen any marks yet. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_clear:N \g_@@_first_marks_tl + \tl_clear:N \g_@@_last_marks_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we extract all top-level marks, thereby filling the token lists +% with suitable \cs{mark_insert:nn} calls. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_extract_and_handle_marks:nn +% \end{macrocode} +% The first argument holds the code for fill the token lists and +% the second is the material we extract from. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_get_from_splitmarks: + { #1 } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Finally, we copy the updated (or not updated) temporary token +% lists to the two that have been supplied when the function was +% called. By convention \enquote{get} operations return their +% values in local variables and \cs{@@_extract_and_handle_marks:nn} +% runs in a group, which is why we have to use global temporary +% variables for collecting. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_set_eq:NN #2 \g_@@_first_marks_tl + \tl_set_eq:NN #3 \g_@@_last_marks_tl +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_get_from_splitmarks:} +% This function is called after we have done a \cs{vsplit} to +% update the split marks. It loops through all mark classes to find +% out if there are marks for this class and if so updates the +% global tls used for collecting. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_get_from_splitmarks: { + \seq_map_inline:Nn \g_@@_classes_seq { - \tl_gset_eq:cc { g_@@_#1_top_ ##1_tl } - { g_@@_#1_last_ ##1_tl } - \tl_gset_eq:cc { g_@@_#1_first_##1_tl } - { g_@@_#1_last_ ##1_tl } +% \end{macrocode} +% First we to get the last mark for the current class from the +% material supplied. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_gset:No \g_@@_tmp_tl + { \tex_splitbotmarks:D \use:c { c_@@_class_##1_mark } } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% If this mark doesn't exist then obviously first mark doesn't +% either, so we do nothing (other than issuing some debugging +% info). + +% We have to be a little careful here: something like +% \verb=\mark_insert:nn{foo}{}= adds an \enquote{empty} mark that +% we should not confuse with the case where there is no mark at +% all. +% +% When there is no mark at all we get a truly empty +% \cs{g_@@_tmp_tl} as a result. This is why we have to make sure +% that an \enquote{empty} mark generated with \cs{mark_insert:nn} +% only appears to be empty when it is typeset, but fails the next +% test (see below how this is done). +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_empty:NTF \g_@@_tmp_tl + { +%<*trace> + \@@_debug:n { \iow_term:x { Marks:~no~ marks~ + for~ class~ '##1'~\msg_line_context: } } +%</trace> + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% If it wasn't empty, i.e., if it had a real value then we use this +% value for our new last mark instead. This means we put an +% appropriate \cs{mark_insert:nn} statement into +% \cs{g_@@_last_marks_tl}. +% \begin{macrocode} + { +%<*trace> + \@@_debug:n { \iow_term:x { Marks:~ extract~ last~ + mark~ for~ class~ '##1'~ =~ \g_@@_tmp_tl } } +%</trace> + \tl_gput_right:Ne \g_@@_last_marks_tl + { \mark_insert:nn {##1} { \g_@@_tmp_tl } } +% \end{macrocode} +% Because we had a last mark we also have a first mark (which might +% be the same, but might not be), so we pick that up and add it to +% the \cs{g_@@_first_marks_tl} token list. This explains why we +% first checked for the last mark because that makes the processing +% faster in case there is none. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*trace> + \@@_debug:n { \iow_term:x { Marks:~ extract~ first~ + mark~ for~ class~ '##1'~ =~ + \tex_splitfirstmarks:D + \use:c { c_@@_class_##1_mark } + } } +%</trace> + \tl_gput_right:Ne \g_@@_first_marks_tl + { \mark_insert:nn {##1} + { + \tex_splitfirstmarks:D + \use:c { c_@@_class_##1_mark } + } + } + } } - } +} % \end{macrocode} -% Once all mark classes have been processed the data structures are -% updated and we can close the group which undoes our local -% changes and retains only the global ones. +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\g_@@_first_marks_tl,\g_@@_last_marks_tl} +% These are two global temporary variables used in the code above. % \begin{macrocode} - \group_end: - } +\tl_new:N \g_@@_first_marks_tl +\tl_new:N \g_@@_last_marks_tl % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % @@ -1098,7 +1430,18 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \@kernel@before@insertmark \hook_use:n { insertmark } - \unrestored@protected@xdef \g_@@_tmp_tl {#2} + \unrestored@protected@xdef \g_@@_tmp_tl + { +% \end{macrocode} +% To ensure that marks are unique we insert a hidden sequence +% marker at the beginning of the content of the mark containing the +% sequence number of the mark. +% \changes{v1.0f}{2024/05/30}{Use sequence marker to make all marks +% unique on nearby regions (gh/1359)} +% \begin{macrocode} + \@@_id:n{ \int_use:N\g_@@_int } + #2 + } %<*trace> \@@_debug:n{ \iow_term:x { Marks:~ set~#1~<-~ '\tl_to_str:V \g_@@_tmp_tl' ~ \msg_line_context: } } @@ -1111,9 +1454,11 @@ % becomes empty, but not immediately; otherwise we just put % \cs{g_@@_tmp_tl} in. % \begin{macrocode} - \tl_if_empty:NTF \g_@@_tmp_tl - { \exp_not:n { \prg_do_nothing: } } - { \exp_not:o { \g_@@_tmp_tl } } +% this is no longer needed with 1.0f +% \tl_if_empty:NTF \g_@@_tmp_tl +% { \exp_not:n { \prg_do_nothing: } } +% { \exp_not:o { \g_@@_tmp_tl } } + \exp_not:o { \g_@@_tmp_tl } } \group_end: % \end{macrocode} @@ -1135,15 +1480,43 @@ % \end{macro} % % +% \begin{macro}{\@@_id:n} +% A hidden marker is placed into every mark added by +% \cs{mark_insert:nn}. It will will not show up in the output but +% its argument (a counter value that is incremented) makes all +% marks unique so the test for \enquote{equal} is not fooled by two +% different marks having the same mark text. +% \changes{v1.0f}{2024/05/30}{Use sequence marker to make all marks +% unique on nearby regions (gh/1359)} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_id:n #1 { } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% % \begin{macro}[int]{\@kernel@before@insertmark} % \begin{macro}{insertmark} % By default \cs{label}, \cs{index}, and \cs{glossary} do nothing % when the mark is inserted. % \begin{macrocode} +\int_new:N \g_@@_int \cs_new:Npn \@kernel@before@insertmark { \cs_set_eq:NN \label \scan_stop: \cs_set_eq:NN \index \scan_stop: \cs_set_eq:NN \glossary \scan_stop: +% \end{macrocode} +% We count each mark and use that to place a hidden marker in front +% of the mark text. To ensure that there is no overflow (very +% unlikely but you never know) we restart every 100000 marks. Thus, +% if somebody puts more than that number of marks on a single page +% you could construct a scenario in which that approach fails. +% \changes{v1.0f}{2024/05/30}{Use sequence marker to make all marks +% unique on nearby regions (gh/1359)} +% \begin{macrocode} + \int_compare:nNnTF \g_@@_int < {99999} + { \int_gincr:N \g_@@_int } + { \int_gzero:N \g_@@_int } + } % \end{macrocode} % The public hook to augment the setup. @@ -1158,15 +1531,25 @@ % To retrieve the first, last or top region mark, we grab the % appropriate value stored in the corresponding token list variable % and pass its contents back. These functions should be used only -% in output routines after \cs{@@_update_structure:nn} has acted, +% in output routines and only after \cs{@@_update_structure_from_material:nn} has acted, % otherwise their value will be wrong. % % If used with an unknown class or region they generate an error % (fairly low-level because we are in an expandable context). +% +% Each mark starts with an id and while the id does not print it is +% nevertheless better to remove it when returning the mark, so that +% downstream manipulation of the data doesn't have to deal with it. +% \changes{v1.0g}{2024/05/31}{Remove the id when returning the mark value (gh/1359)} % \begin{macrocode} -\cs_new:Npn \mark_use_first:nn #1#2 { \exp_not:v { g_@@_#1_first_#2_tl } } -\cs_new:Npn \mark_use_last:nn #1#2 { \exp_not:v { g_@@_#1_last_#2_tl } } -\cs_new:Npn \mark_use_top:nn #1#2 { \exp_not:v { g_@@_#1_top_#2_tl } } +\cs_new:Npn \mark_use_first:nn #1#2 { \@@_use:v { g_@@_#1_first_#2_tl } } +\cs_new:Npn \mark_use_last:nn #1#2 { \@@_use:v { g_@@_#1_last_#2_tl } } +\cs_new:Npn \mark_use_top:nn #1#2 { \@@_use:v { g_@@_#1_top_#2_tl } } +% \end{macrocode} +% This is what the \cs{use_none:nn} accomplishes. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_use:n #1 { \exp_not:o { \use_none:nn #1 } } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_use:n { v } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % @@ -1207,7 +1590,7 @@ % % \subsection{Messages} % -% Mark errors are LaTeX kernel errors: +% Mark errors are \LaTeX{} kernel errors: % \changes{v1.0d}{2022/06/01}{Marks are kernel errors} % \begin{macrocode} \prop_gput:Nnn \g_msg_module_type_prop { mark } { LaTeX } @@ -1247,17 +1630,7 @@ } % \end{macrocode} % -% \begin{macrocode} -\msg_new:nnnn { mark } { infinite-shrinkage } - { Infinite~shrinkage~found~in~'#1'. } - { - \c__msg_coding_error_text_tl - The~mark~region~'#1'~contains~some~infinite~negative~glue~ - allowing~it~to~shrink~to~an~arbitrary~size.~ - This~makes~it~impossible~to~split~the~region~apart~to~ - get~at~its~marks.~They~are~lost. - } -% \end{macrocode} +% % % % @@ -1358,7 +1731,7 @@ % % % \begin{macro}{\@@_status:n} -% Show all mark class values across all regions. +% Show a snapshot of all mark class values across all regions. % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_status:n #1 { @@ -1370,6 +1743,22 @@ % \end{macro} % % +% \begin{macro}{\ShowMarksAt} +% \changes{v1.0e}{2024/01/29}{Macro added} +% Debugging helper that displays a snapshot of all known mark +% structures. The argument is a text string that is +% displayed to help identifying when the snapshot was made. +% +% This may not stay like this (or at all), which is why it isn't +% yet documented as an official command. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \ShowMarksAt #1 { +%<*trace> + \@@_debug:n { \@@_status:n {#1} } +%</trace> +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Designer-level interfaces} @@ -1425,9 +1814,9 @@ % % % -% \section{\LaTeXe{} integration} +% \section{\LaTeXe{} integration} % -% \subsection{Core \LaTeXe{} integration} +% \subsection{Core \LaTeXe{} integration} % % \begin{macro}{\@@_update_singlecol_structures:} % This command updates the mark structures if we are producing a @@ -1445,11 +1834,11 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \box_if_vertical:NTF \@outputbox { - \@@_update_structure:nn {page} + \@@_update_structure_from_material:nn {page} { \vbox_unpack:N \@outputbox } } { - \@@_update_structure:nn {page} + \@@_update_structure_from_material:nn {page} { \hbox_unpack:N \@outputbox } } % \end{macrocode} @@ -1489,11 +1878,11 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \box_if_vertical:NTF \@outputbox { - \@@_update_structure:nn {column} + \@@_update_structure_from_material:nn {column} { \vbox_unpack:N \@outputbox } } { - \@@_update_structure:nn {column} + \@@_update_structure_from_material:nn {column} { \hbox_unpack:N \@outputbox } } % \end{macrocode} @@ -1538,6 +1927,12 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \seq_map_inline:Nn \g_@@_classes_seq { +% \end{macrocode} +% The \texttt{previous-page} updates need to come before the +% updates for \texttt{page} region because otherwise the values +% to copy are already overwritten. +% necessary values. +% \begin{macrocode} \tl_gset_eq:cc { g_@@_previous-page_top_ ##1 _tl } { g_@@_page_top_ ##1 _tl } \tl_gset_eq:cc { g_@@_previous-page_first_ ##1 _tl } @@ -1545,16 +1940,48 @@ \tl_gset_eq:cc { g_@@_previous-page_last_ ##1 _tl } { g_@@_page_last_ ##1 _tl } % \end{macrocode} -% The \texttt{page} updates need to come after the corresponding -% updates for \texttt{previous-page} otherwise we loose the -% necessary value. +% To update the \texttt{top} we only have to copy what is in +% \texttt{first-column}: % \begin{macrocode} \tl_gset_eq:cc { g_@@_page_top_ ##1 _tl } { g_@@_first-column_top_ ##1 _tl } - \tl_gset_eq:cc { g_@@_ page_first_ ##1 _tl } - { g_@@_first-column_first_ ##1 _tl } - \tl_gset_eq:cc { g_@@_page_last_ ##1 _tl } - { g_@@_last-column_last_ ##1 _tl } + +% \end{macrocode} +% Updating the \texttt{first} mark for the \texttt{page} region is +% more complicated. We first have to find out of there is any mark +% in the first column (this can be done by comparing the \texttt{top} and +% the \texttt{first} mark of of that region). +% \changes{v1.0f}{2024/05/30}{Correct logic for first mark in page +% region if first column contains no marks (gh/1359)} +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_if_eq:ccTF { g__@@_first-column_top_ ##1 _tl } + { g__@@_first-column_first_ ##1 _tl } + { +% \end{macrocode} +% If there is no mark in the first column we copy the first mark of +% the last column. If that doesn't contain a mark we still get the +% right result because the first mark is then equal to the top mark. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_gset_eq:cc { g_@@_page_first_ ##1 _tl } + { g_@@_last-column_first_ ##1 _tl } + } + { +% \end{macrocode} +% On the other hand, if there is a mark in the first column we copy +% over the \texttt{first} mark from that column. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_gset_eq:cc { g_@@_page_first_ ##1 _tl } + { g_@@_first-column_first_ ##1 _tl } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% The logic for the \texttt{last} page mark is again simple, we can +% just copy the value in the \texttt{last} mark of the last column. +% If that column doesn't contain any marks, then the value in +% \texttt{last} will be automatically the same as the \texttt{last} +% from the first column. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_gset_eq:cc { g_@@_page_last_ ##1 _tl } + { g_@@_last-column_last_ ##1 _tl } } } %<*trace> @@ -1583,17 +2010,26 @@ %<@@=> % \end{macrocode} % -% \begin{macro}[int]{\@expl@@@mark@update@singlecol@structures@@, -% \@expl@@@mark@update@dblcol@structures@@} +% \begin{macro}[int]{\@expl@@@mark@update@singlecol@structures@@} % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_eq:NN \@expl@@@mark@update@singlecol@structures@@ \__mark_update_singlecol_structures: +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}[int]{\@expl@@@mark@update@dblcol@structures@@} +% \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_eq:NN \@expl@@@mark@update@dblcol@structures@@ \__mark_update_dblcol_structures: % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % -% \subsection{Other \LaTeXe{} output routines} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Other \LaTeXe{} output routines} % % This section will cover \pkg{multicol} and other packages altering % or providing their own output routine. Not done yet. @@ -1601,6 +2037,9 @@ % % % +% \subsection{Rollback information} +% +% % \begin{macrocode} %<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{ltmarks}% %<latexrelease> {Undo~Marks~handling} @@ -1609,7 +2048,7 @@ % We keep the interface commands around even if we roll back in % case they are used in packages that don't roll back. Not likely % to do a lot of good, but then there is not much we can do, but -% this at least then doesn't give errors. +% this at least they won't give unknown csname errors. % \begin{macrocode} %<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand \NewMarkClass[1]{} %<latexrelease>\DeclareRobustCommand \InsertMark[2]{} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmeta.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmeta.dtx index 30da4016fb4..cc3e62811df 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmeta.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmeta.dtx @@ -13,20 +13,14 @@ % % %%% From File: ltmeta.dtx -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ltmetaversion{v1.0b} -\def\ltmetadate{2022/05/18} -% \end{macrocode} %<*driver> +% \fi +\ProvidesFile{ltmeta.dtx} + [2024/05/16 v1.0b LaTeX Kernel (Document Metadata)] +% \iffalse +% \documentclass{l3doc} - -% Fixing footnotes in functions and variables: this should be in l3doc! - -\newcommand\fixfootnote[2]{\footnotemark - \AddToHookNext{env/#1/after}{\footnotetext{#2}}} -\AddToHook{env/function/begin}{\def\footnote{\fixfootnote{function}}} -\AddToHook{env/variable/begin}{\def\footnote{\fixfootnote{variable}}} +\GetFileInfo{ltmeta.dtx} \EnableCrossrefs \CodelineIndex @@ -43,7 +37,7 @@ % % % \title{The \texttt{ltmeta.dtx} code\thanks{This file has version -% \ltmetaversion\ dated \ltmetadate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ +% \fileversion\ dated \filedate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ % Project.}} % \author{Frank Mittelbach} % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx index 9706f272035..accdac24b2f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltmiscen.dtx} - [2023/09/13 v1.2c LaTeX Kernel (Misc. Environments)] + [2024/02/08 v1.2c LaTeX Kernel (Misc. Environments)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltmiscen.dtx} @@ -509,8 +509,8 @@ % endings are converted to spaces by \TeX{} during that process. % % However, especially the \texttt{.toc} file might be read in L-R mode -% (in cases the \cs{tableofcontents} attempts to put, say a list of -% sub-sections as a paragraph. In that case the newlines after a line +% (in cases the \cs{tableofcontents} attempts to put, say, a list of +% sub-sections as a paragraph). In that case the newlines after a line % like % \begin{verbatim} % \contentsline {subsubsection}{\numberline {1.1.1}A C-head}{2} @@ -520,9 +520,9 @@ % % That could be fixed by reading in the file using % \cs{endlinechar}\texttt{=-1} but that has the danger that it drops -% some valid endlines that should be converted to spaces (for example +% some valid endlines that should be converted to spaces (for example, % when the user edited the TOC and then used \cs{nofiles} to preserve -% it. +% it). % % So the approach taken instead is this: % \begin{itemize} @@ -1604,7 +1604,7 @@ % ``\verb=!~!foo='' in the output. % To avoid this scenario we check if \verb=#1= has the character % code of a space, if so we recurse otherwise we call \cs{@@sverb} -% (which is the original definition of \cs{@sverb}. +% (which is the original definition of \cs{@sverb}). % \changes{v1.1u}{2020/04/22}{Drop spaces before \cs{verb} delimiter (gh/327)} % \begin{macrocode} \def\@sverb#1{\if\noexpand#1 \expandafter\@sverb\else\@@sverb{#1}\fi} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx index e7d48e4ba20..c18ff014464 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltoutenc.dtx} - [2022/05/27 v2.0z LaTeX Kernel (font encodings)] + [2024/02/08 v2.1a LaTeX Kernel (font encodings)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltoutenc.dtx} @@ -383,10 +383,10 @@ % other encodings, so there are some optimizations provided: % \begin{quote} % |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{|^^A -% \meta{command}|}|^^A +% \meta{command}|}{|^^A % \meta{encoding}|}|\\ % |\DeclareTextAccentDefault{|^^A -% \meta{command}|}|^^A +% \meta{command}|}{|^^A % \meta{encoding}|}| % \end{quote} % are short for: @@ -840,7 +840,7 @@ % interfere between accent and base character. Therefore we need to % avoid that (they are some hidden inside \cs{maybe@load@fontshape}). % As we don't have to load the fontshape in this case -% (as that happened in the box above if necessary, we simply +% (as that already happened in the box above, if necessary), we simply % disable that part of the code temporarily. % We also ignore \cs{ignorespaces} which has the same issue and may % show up as part of \cs{normalfont} if that is used. @@ -3659,10 +3659,10 @@ \let\encodingdefault\CurrentOption % \end{macrocode} % From 2020/02/02 release onward we only load the encoding files if -% they haven't be loaded already. To check this we look if -% \verb=\T@=\textit{encoding} is already defined. If not we load +% they haven't be loaded already. To check this we look at whether +% \verb=\T@=\textit{encoding} is already defined. If not, we load it later % (indicated by setting the switch -% \texttt{@tempswa} to true and we always load if we run in an older +% \texttt{@tempswa} to true) and we always load if we are using an older % format (or rather in a rollback situation). % \changes{v2.0m}{2020/01/25}{Load each encoding file only once (gh/255)} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -3677,6 +3677,7 @@ \if@tempswa % \end{macrocode} % +% \changes{v2.1a}{2023/11/07}{Add more explanation to error message (gh/1102)} % \begin{macrocode} \edef\reserved@f{% \lowercase{\def\noexpand\reserved@f{\CurrentOption enc.def}}}% @@ -3685,7 +3686,11 @@ {}{\PackageError{fontenc}% {Encoding file `\reserved@f' not found.% \MessageBreak - You might have misspelt the name of the encoding}% + You might have misspelled the name of the encoding + \MessageBreak + or a required support package (e.g., cyrillic) is + \MessageBreak + missing in your installation}% {Necessary code for this encoding was not loaded.\MessageBreak Thus calling the encoding later on will @@ -3723,8 +3728,8 @@ % \end{macrocode} % % We select the new font encoding default (i.e., the last encoding -% specified in the option list. But this encoding may not work with -% the current |\f@shape|, e.g., \texttt{LY1} is not defined for +% specified in the option list). But this encoding may not work with +% the current |\f@shape|: e.g., \texttt{LY1} is not defined for % \texttt{cmr} and therefore packages switching to \texttt{LY1} % usually also change \cs{rmdefault}. But that only applies at % |\begin{document}| so we get a spurious warning if we use what diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx index b067ef5ecbd..f0c1bf830b3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltoutput.dtx} - [2023/05/26 v1.4j LaTeX Kernel (Output Routine)] + [2024/03/16 v1.4j LaTeX Kernel (Output Routine)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltoutput.dtx} @@ -847,7 +847,7 @@ % \begin{macro}{\if@firstcolumn} % \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn} % \begin{macro}{\if@twoside} -% \begin{macro}{\if@reversemarginpar} +% \begin{macro}{\if@reversemargin} % \begin{macro}{\if@mparswitch} % \begin{macro}{\col@number} % \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Added \cs{col@number}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx index f76352fb917..f102d68e0d6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpara.dtx @@ -14,21 +14,14 @@ % %%% From File: ltpara.dtx % -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ltparaversion{v1.0l} -\def\ltparadate{2023/01/30} -% \end{macrocode} %<*driver> +% \fi +\ProvidesFile{ltpara.dtx} + [2024/05/16 v1.0m LaTeX Kernel (paragraph hooks)] +% \iffalse +% \documentclass{l3doc} - -%\usepackage{ltpara} - -% Fixing footnotes in functions and variables: this should be in l3doc! - -\newcommand\fixfootnote[2]{\footnotemark - \AddToHookNext{env/#1/after}{\footnotetext{#2}}} -\AddToHook{env/function/begin}{\def\footnote{\fixfootnote{function}}} -\AddToHook{env/variable/begin}{\def\footnote{\fixfootnote{variable}}} +\GetFileInfo{ltpara.dtx} \EnableCrossrefs \CodelineIndex @@ -45,7 +38,7 @@ % % % \title{The \texttt{ltpara.dtx} code\thanks{This file has version -% \ltparaversion\ dated \ltparadate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ +% \fileversion\ dated \filedate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ % Project.}} % \author{Frank Mittelbach} % @@ -811,9 +804,11 @@ \hook_use:n {para/begin} % \end{macrocode} % If we aren't in horizontal mode any longer the hooks above misbehaved. +% \changes{v1.0m}{2023/11/16}{Correct error message: hook +% left horizontal not vertical mode (gh/1182)} % \begin{macrocode} \if_mode_horizontal: \else: - \msg_error:nnnn { hooks }{ para-mode }{begin}{vertical} \fi: + \msg_error:nnnn { hooks }{ para-mode }{begin}{horizontal} \fi: % \end{macrocode} % Finally we reinsert the indentation box (unless suppressed) and % then call \cs{everypar} the way legacy \LaTeX\ code expects it. @@ -845,7 +840,7 @@ %<latexrelease> \@kernel@before@para@begin %<latexrelease> \hook_use:n {para/begin} %<latexrelease> \if_mode_horizontal: \else: -%<latexrelease> \msg_error:nnnn { hooks }{ para-mode }{begin}{vertical} \fi: +%<latexrelease> \msg_error:nnnn { hooks }{ para-mode }{begin}{horizontal} \fi: %<latexrelease> \@@_handle_indent: %<latexrelease>} % \end{macrocode} @@ -1261,7 +1256,7 @@ % redo the \cs{everypar} setting from the kernel, otherwise that % gets lost (as it happens before that file is loaded). % \begin{macrocode} -\everypar{\@nodocument} %% To get an error if text appears before the +\everypar{\@nodocument} %% To get an error if text appears before the \document % \end{macrocode} % % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx index 37733735623..a628b954d97 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltplain.dtx} - [2023/10/21 v2.3i LaTeX Kernel (Plain TeX)] + [2024/02/08 v2.3j LaTeX Kernel (Plain TeX)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltplain.dtx} @@ -1241,11 +1241,11 @@ %<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2022/06/01}{\obeylines}% %<latexrelease> {Add a redirection to obeylines and obeyspaces}% % \end{macrocode} -% If the active |^^M| escapes, e.g. into a \cs{write} (which is -% effectively in a different context) we don't want the definition +% If the active |^^M| escapes, e.g., into a \cs{write} (which is +% effectively in a different context) then we don't want the definition % from \cs{obeylines} but rather a simple \cs{par} (in fact even % the primitive one, not the \LaTeX{} version \cs{para\_end:} which -% is only defined later. +% is only defined later). % % \begin{macrocode} \begingroup @@ -1263,7 +1263,7 @@ % line ending characters and in that mode \TeX{} discards % everything from that point onwards to the real end of the line so % it works like a comment --- pretty strange really (and I think -% due to the fact the the original pascal compiler could have some +% due to the fact that the original pascal compiler could have some % garbage showing up after the normal line ending character. Thus % we really have to make sure that any closing braces is not one % the same line as an |^^M|, because otherwise it would get dropped @@ -1293,7 +1293,7 @@ % one that is current when \cs{obeylines} act. % % There is a small subtlety here: in an \cs{edef} the active |^^M| stayed -% put (because it was equal to to the primitive \cs{par}), now +% put (because it was equal to the primitive \cs{par}), now % \cs{obeyedline} expands and you get what it contains, i.e., in that % case \cs{par}, into the \cs{edef} or \cs{mark} unless we use % \cs{protected} on it. @@ -1813,7 +1813,13 @@ \tracinggroups\z@ \tracingparagraphs\z@ \tracingmacros\z@ - \tracinglostchars\@ne +% \end{macrocode} +% None really means go back to the \LaTeX{} ``default'' and for +% \cs{tracinglostchars} this should therefore be 2 these days. +% \changes{v2.3j}{2023/11/07}{Set \cs{tracinglostchars} to 2 in +% \cs{tracingnone} (gh/549)} +% \begin{macrocode} + \tracinglostchars\tw@ \tracingpages\z@ \tracingstats\z@ }% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltproperties.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltproperties.dtx index 40c50cd20a2..0fd8f22e0ef 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltproperties.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltproperties.dtx @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -%% File: ltproperties.dtx +% File: ltproperties.dtx % -% Copyright (C) 2021-2023 The LaTeX Project +% Copyright (C) 2023-2024 The LaTeX Project % % It may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the % LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), either version 1.3c of this @@ -21,13 +21,21 @@ % https://github.com/latex3/latex2e % % for those people who are interested. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ltpropertiesversion{1.0c} -\def\ltpropertiesdate{2023-10-15} -% \end{macrocode} - -%<*driver> +% +% \fi +% +% \iffalse +%%% From File: ltproperties.dtx +% +%<*driver> +% \fi +\ProvidesFile{ltproperties.dtx} + [2024/04/17 v1.0e LaTeX Kernel (Properties)] +% \iffalse +% \documentclass[full]{l3doc} +\GetFileInfo{ltproperties.dtx} + \EnableCrossrefs \CodelineIndex \begin{document} @@ -39,7 +47,7 @@ % \title{^^A % Recording and cross-referencing document properties^^A % \thanks{This module has version -% \ltpropertiesversion\ dated \ltpropertiesdate, \copyright\ The \LaTeX\ +% \fileversion\ dated \filedate, \copyright\ The \LaTeX\ % Project.} % } % @@ -157,8 +165,8 @@ % % \begin{function}{\property_new:nnnn,\property_gset:nnnn} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{property_new:nnnn} \Arg{property} \Arg{setpoint} \Arg{default} \Arg{code} -% \cs{property_gset:nnnn} \Arg{property}\Arg{setpoint} \Arg{default} \Arg{code} +% \cs{property_new:nnnn} \Arg{property} \Arg{setpoint} \Arg{default} \Arg{code} +% \cs{property_gset:nnnn} \Arg{property} \Arg{setpoint} \Arg{default} \Arg{code} % \end{syntax} % \LaTeXe-interface: see \cs{NewProperty}, \cs{SetProperty}.\\ % Sets the \meta{property} to have the \meta{default} specified, and at the @@ -180,7 +188,7 @@ % \property_record:nn, \property_record:nV, \property_record:ee % } % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{property_record:nN} \Arg{label} \Arg{clist var} +% \cs{property_record:nN} \Arg{label} \meta{clist var} % \cs{property_record:nn} \Arg{label} \Arg{clist} % \end{syntax} % \LaTeXe{}-interface: see \cs{RecordProperties}.\\ @@ -266,7 +274,7 @@ % \cs{property_if_exist_p:n} \Arg{property} % \cs{property_if_exist:nTF} \Arg{property} \Arg{true code} \Arg{false code} % \end{syntax} -% \LaTeXe{}-interface: \cs{IfPropertyExistTF}.\\ +% \LaTeXe{}-interface: \cs{IfPropertyExistsTF}.\\ % Tests if the \meta{property} has been declared. % \end{function} % @@ -275,7 +283,7 @@ % \cs{property_if_recorded_p:n} \Arg{label} % \cs{property_if_recorded:nTF} \Arg{label} \Arg{true code} \Arg{false code} % \end{syntax} -% \LaTeXe{}-interface: \cs{IfLabelExistTF}\\ +% \LaTeXe{}-interface: \cs{IfLabelExistsTF}\\ % Tests if the \meta{label} is known. This is also true if the label has been % set with the standard \cs{label} command. % \end{function} @@ -307,8 +315,8 @@ % % \begin{function}{\NewProperty,\SetProperty} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{NewProperty} \Arg{property} \Arg{setpoint} \Arg{default} \Arg{code} -% \cs{SetProperty} \Arg{property} \Arg{setpoint} \Arg{default} \Arg{code} +% \cs{NewProperty} \Arg{property} \Arg{setpoint} \Arg{default} \Arg{code} +% \cs{SetProperty} \Arg{property} \Arg{setpoint} \Arg{default} \Arg{code} % \end{syntax} % Sets the \meta{property} to have the \meta{default} specified, and at the % \meta{setpoint} (either |now| or |shipout|) to write the result of the @@ -329,7 +337,7 @@ % of properties. Also similar to the standard \cs{label} command, the command is surrounded % by an \cs{@bsphack}/\cs{@esphack} pair to preserve spacing. % \end{function} - +% % \begin{function}[EXP]{\RefProperty} % \begin{syntax} % \cs{RefProperty} \oarg{local default} \Arg{label} \Arg{property} @@ -340,16 +348,16 @@ % If \Arg{property} has not been declared an error is issued. % \end{function} % -% \begin{function}{\IfPropertyExistTF} +% \begin{function}{\IfPropertyExistsTF,\IfPropertyExistsT,\IfPropertyExistsF} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{IfPropertyExistTF} \Arg{property} \Arg{true code} \Arg{false code} +% \cs{IfPropertyExistsTF} \Arg{property} \Arg{true code} \Arg{false code} % \end{syntax} % Tests if the \meta{property} has been declared. % \end{function} % -% \begin{function}{\IfLabelExistTF} +% \begin{function}{\IfLabelExistsTF,\IfLabelExistsT,\IfLabelExistsF} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{IfLabelExistTF} \Arg{label} \Arg{true code} \Arg{false code} +% \cs{IfLabelExistsTF} \Arg{label} \Arg{true code} \Arg{false code} % \end{syntax} % Tests if the \meta{label} has been recorded. This is also true if a label % has been set with the standard \cs{label} command. @@ -361,7 +369,7 @@ % \end{syntax} % Tests if the label and a value of the \meta{property} for the \meta{label} are both known. % \end{function} - +% % \begin{function}{\RefUndefinedWarn} % \begin{syntax} % \cs{RefUndefinedWarn} \Arg{label} \Arg{property} @@ -551,6 +559,7 @@ % later too. That is all pretty easy using \pkg{expl3}: we accept a stray % comma at the end of the list as that is easier to deal with than trying % to tidy up, and there is no real downside. +% \changes{v1.0d}{2024-01-17}{Use \cs{protected@write}}% % \begin{macrocode} \cs_new_protected:Npn \property_record:nN #1#2 { \property_record:nV {#1} #2 } @@ -561,7 +570,7 @@ { \legacy_if:nT { @filesw } { - \iow_shipout_x:Nx \@auxout + \protected@write \@auxout {} { \token_to_str:N \new@label@record {#1} @@ -737,9 +746,13 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % -% \begin{macro}{IfPropertyExistTF} +% \begin{macro}{\IfPropertyExistsTF,\IfPropertyExistsT,\IfPropertyExistsF} +% \changes{v1.0e}{2024-04-17}{Renamed \cs{IfPropertyExistTF} to +% \cs{IfPropertyExistsTF} (gh/1262)} % \begin{macrocode} -\cs_new_eq:NN \IfPropertyExistTF \property_if_exist:eTF +\cs_new_eq:NN \IfPropertyExistsTF \property_if_exist:eTF +\cs_new:Npn \IfPropertyExistsT #1#2 {\property_if_exist:eTF {#1}{#2}{} } +\cs_new:Npn \IfPropertyExistsF #1 {\property_if_exist:eTF {#1}{} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % @@ -762,9 +775,13 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % -% \begin{macro}{\IfLabelExistTF} +% \begin{macro}{\IfLabelExistsTF,\IfLabelExistsT,\IfLabelExistsF} +% \changes{v1.0e}{2024-04-17}{Renamed \cs{IfLabelExistTF} to +% \cs{IfLabelExistsTF} (gh/1262)} % \begin{macrocode} -\cs_new_eq:NN \IfLabelExistTF \property_if_recorded:eTF +\cs_new_eq:NN \IfLabelExistsTF \property_if_recorded:eTF +\cs_new:Npn \IfLabelExistsT #1#2 {\property_if_exist:eTF {#1}{#2}{} } +\cs_new:Npn \IfLabelExistsF #1 {\property_if_exist:eTF {#1}{} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % @@ -938,8 +955,8 @@ %<latexrelease>\let \RefProperty \@undefined %<latexrelease>\let \RefUndefinedWarn \@undefined %<latexrelease> -%<latexrelease>\let \IfPropertyExistTF \@undefined -%<latexrelease>\let \IfLabelExistTF \@undefined +%<latexrelease>\let \IfPropertyExistsTF \@undefined +%<latexrelease>\let \IfLabelExistsTF \@undefined %<latexrelease>\let \IfPropertyRecordedTF \@undefined %<latexrelease> %<latexrelease>\let\new@label@record \@undefined diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx index 4560704463a..21aeda32e02 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ %%% From File: ltsect.dtx %<*driver> % \fi -\ProvidesFile{ltsect.dtx}[2021/07/28 v1.1f LaTeX Kernel (Sectioning)] +\ProvidesFile{ltsect.dtx}[2024/03/25 v1.1f LaTeX Kernel (Sectioning)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltsect.dtx} @@ -835,13 +835,13 @@ % \begin{macro}{\contentsline} % The |\contentsline{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{entry}|}{|\meta{page}|}{}| % macro produces a \meta{type} entry in a table of contents, etc. -% It will appear in the |.toc| or other file. For example, -% The entry for subsection 1.4.3 in the table of contents for -% example, might be produced by: +% It will appear in the |.toc| or other file. +% For example, the entry for subsection 1.4.3 in the table of contents, +% might be produced by: % % \begin{verbatim} % \contentsline{subsection} -% {\makebox{30pt}[r]{1.4.3} Gnats and Gnus}{22} +% {\numberline{1.4.3}Gnats and Gnus}{22}{} % \end{verbatim} % % The |\protect| command causes command sequences to be written diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltshipout.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltshipout.dtx index aaeba15ea70..0c9113ce938 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltshipout.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltshipout.dtx @@ -31,30 +31,14 @@ % %%% From File: ltshipout.dtx % -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\ltshipoutversion{v1.0n} -\providecommand\ltshipoutdate{2022/11/08} -% \end{macrocode} -% %<*driver> - +% \fi +\ProvidesFile{ltshipout.dtx} + [2024/02/11 v1.0n LaTeX Kernel (Shipout)] +% \iffalse +% \documentclass{l3doc} - -% bug fix fo l3doc.cls -\ExplSyntaxOn -\cs_set_protected:Npn \__codedoc_macro_typeset_one:nN #1#2 - { - \vbox_set:Nn \l__codedoc_macro_box - { - \vbox_unpack_drop:N \l__codedoc_macro_box - \hbox { \llap { \__codedoc_print_macroname:nN {#1} #2 - \MacroFont % <----- without it the \ is in lmr10 if a link is made - \ - } } - } - \int_incr:N \l__codedoc_macro_int - } -\ExplSyntaxOff +\GetFileInfo{ltshipout.dtx} \providecommand\InternalDetectionOff{} \providecommand\InternalDetectionOn{} @@ -76,7 +60,7 @@ % % % \title{The \texttt{ltshipout} documentation\thanks{This file has version -% \ltshipoutversion\ dated \ltshipoutdate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ +% \fileversion\ dated \filedate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ % Project.}} % % \author{Frank Mittelbach, \LaTeX{} Project Team} @@ -859,7 +843,7 @@ % % \changes{v1.0d}{2020/11/23}{Check for both kernel and user hook (gh/431)} % \changes{v1.0f}{2021/01/08}{Added another kernel hook for more -% flexibility (cf \texttt{https://github.com/pgf-tikz/pgf/issues/960}} +% flexibility (cf.\ \texttt{https://github.com/pgf-tikz/pgf/issues/960}} % \begin{macrocode} \bool_lazy_and:nnF { \hook_if_empty_p:n {shipout/background} } diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsockets.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsockets.dtx index 909792a4f54..243963f7bcc 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsockets.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsockets.dtx @@ -30,14 +30,14 @@ % %%% From File: ltsockets.dtx % -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ltsocketsversion{0.9a} -\def\ltsocketsdate{2023-08-21} -% \end{macrocode} +%<*driver> +% \fi +\ProvidesFile{ltsockets.dtx} + [2024/02/11 v0.9a LaTeX Kernel (Sockets)] +% \iffalse % -%<*driver> \documentclass{l3doc} - +\GetFileInfo{ltsockets.dtx} \providecommand\InternalDetectionOff{} \providecommand\InternalDetectionOn{} @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ % % % \title{\LaTeX{}'s socket management\thanks{This module has version -% \ltsocketsversion\ dated \ltsocketsdate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ +% \fileversion\ dated \filedate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ % Project.}} % % \author{Frank Mittelbach} @@ -530,8 +530,8 @@ % % \begin{function}{\NewSocket,\socket_new:nn} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{NewSocket} \Arg{socket-name}\Arg{number-of-inputs} -% \cs{socket_new:nn}\Arg{socket-name}\Arg{number-of-inputs} +% \cs{NewSocket} \Arg{socket-name} \Arg{number-of-inputs} +% \cs{socket_new:nn} \Arg{socket-name} \Arg{number-of-inputs} % \end{syntax} % Declares a new socket with name \meta{socket-name} having % \meta{number-of-inputs} inputs. There is automatically a @@ -563,9 +563,9 @@ % % \begin{function}{\NewSocketPlug,\socket_new_plug:nnn,\socket_set_plug:nnn} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{NewSocketPlug} \Arg{socket-name}\Arg{socket-plug-name}\Arg{code} -% \cs{socket_new_plug:nnn}\Arg{socket-name}\Arg{socket-plug-name}\Arg{code} -% \cs{socket_set_plug:nnn}\Arg{socket-name}\Arg{socket-plug-name}\Arg{code} +% \cs{NewSocketPlug} \Arg{socket-name} \Arg{socket-plug-name} \Arg{code} +% \cs{socket_new_plug:nnn} \Arg{socket-name} \Arg{socket-plug-name} \Arg{code} +% \cs{socket_set_plug:nnn} \Arg{socket-name} \Arg{socket-plug-name} \Arg{code} % \end{syntax} % Declares a new plug for socket \meta{socket-name} that runs % \meta{code} when executing. It complains if the plug was already @@ -582,8 +582,8 @@ % % \begin{function}{\AssignSocketPlug,\socket_assign_plug:nn} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{AssignSocketPlug} \Arg{socket-name}\Arg{socket-plug-name} -% \cs{socket_assign_plug:nn}\Arg{socket-name}\Arg{socket-plug-name} +% \cs{AssignSocketPlug} \Arg{socket-name} \Arg{socket-plug-name} +% \cs{socket_assign_plug:nn} \Arg{socket-name} \Arg{socket-plug-name} % \end{syntax} % Assigns the plug \meta{socket-plug-name} to the socket % \meta{socket-name}. It errors if either socket or plug is not @@ -595,8 +595,8 @@ % % \begin{function}{\UseSocket,\socket_use:nw,\socket_use:n,\socket_use:nn,\socket_use:nnn,\socket_use:nnnn} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{UseSocket} \Arg{socket-name} -% \cs{socket_use:nnn}\Arg{socket-name} \Arg{socket-arg\textsubscript{1}} \Arg{socket-arg\textsubscript{2}} +% \cs{UseSocket} \Arg{socket-name} +% \cs{socket_use:nnn} \Arg{socket-name} \Arg{socket-arg\textsubscript{1}} \Arg{socket-arg\textsubscript{2}} % \end{syntax} % Executes the socket \meta{socket-name} by retrieving the % \meta{code} of the current plug assigned to the socket. This is @@ -619,8 +619,8 @@ % % \begin{function}{\ShowSocket,\LogSocket,\socket_show:n,\socket_log:n} % \begin{syntax} -% \cs{ShowSocket} \Arg{socket-name} -% \cs{socket_show:n}\Arg{socket-name} +% \cs{ShowSocket} \Arg{socket-name} +% \cs{socket_show:n} \Arg{socket-name} % \end{syntax} % Displays information about the socket \meta{socket-name} and its % state then stops and waits for further instructions --- at the diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx index 73941d48156..206e4f38858 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltspace.dtx} - [2023/10/26 v1.3r LaTeX Kernel (spacing)] + [2024/02/08 v1.3r LaTeX Kernel (spacing)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltspace.dtx} @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ % \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/08} % {Command reimplemented; late birthday present for Chris} % \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/08}{Command reimplemented} -% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/16}{Corrected optimisation :-)} +% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/16}{Corrected optimisation} % |\@bsphack| and |\@esphack| % used by macros such as |\index| and % |\begin{@float}| \ldots |\end{@float}| @@ -1156,8 +1156,8 @@ % \subsection{Horizontal space (and breaks)} % % \begin{macro}{\nobreakdashes} -% \changes{v1.3}{2004/02/04}{(Macro added} -% \changes{v1.3a}{2004/02/15}{(Added spacefactor setting} +% \changes{v1.3}{2004/02/04}{Macro added} +% \changes{v1.3a}{2004/02/15}{Added spacefactor setting} % This idea is borrowed from the \textsf{amsmath} package but % here we define a robust command. % @@ -1194,7 +1194,7 @@ % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\nobreakspace} -% \changes{v1.2k}{1995/12/04}{(Macro added} +% \changes{v1.2k}{1995/12/04}{Macro added} % \changes{v1.3r}{2023/10/26}{Protected definition for tilde} % \begin{macro}{\@xobeysp} % \changes{v1.2t}{1996/09/28}{Moved from ltmiscen.dtx and redefined to @@ -1209,7 +1209,7 @@ % % The braces in the definition of |~| are needed to ensure that a % following space is preserved when reading to/from internal files. -% \changes{v1.2l}{1995/12/04}{(braces added to definition of tilde} +% \changes{v1.2l}{1995/12/04}{braces added to definition of tilde} % % We need to keep \cs{@xobeysp} as it is widely used; so here it is % let to the non-robust command \cs{nobreakspace }. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttagging.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttagging.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..585479df214 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttagging.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,775 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright (C) 2023-2024 +% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2008 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% +% \iffalse +%%% From File: lttagging.dtx +% +%<*driver> +% \fi +\ProvidesFile{lttagging.dtx} + [2023/12/19 v1.0a LaTeX Kernel (tagging support)] +% \iffalse +\documentclass{l3doc} +\GetFileInfo{lttagging.dtx} +\title{\filename} +\date{\filedate} +\author{\LaTeX{} project} + +\begin{document} +% \MaintainedByLaTeXTeam{latex} % should be added again the moment + % it is supported by l3doc + \maketitle + \DocInput{\filename} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% \fi +% +% \providecommand\env[1]{\texttt{#1}} +% +% \providecommand\hook[1]{\texttt{#1\DescribeHook[noprint]{#1}}} +% \providecommand\socket[1]{\texttt{#1\DescribeSocket[noprint]{#1}}} +% \providecommand\plug[1]{\texttt{#1\DescribePlug[noprint]{#1}}} +% +% \let\ProvideDocElement\NewDocElement +% +% \ProvideDocElement[printtype=\textit{socket},idxtype=socket,idxgroup=Sockets]{Socket}{socketdecl} +% \ProvideDocElement[printtype=\textit{hook},idxtype=hook,idxgroup=Hooks]{Hook}{hookdecl} +% \ProvideDocElement[printtype=\textit{plug},idxtype=plug,idxgroup=Plugs]{Plug}{plugdecl} +% +% +% \section{} +% +% +% +% \MaybeStop{} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*2ekernel|latexrelease> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOn +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \section{General support for tagged output} +% +% \DescribeMacro\SuspendTagging +% \DescribeMacro\ResumeTagging +% +% The are places in code where it is import top stop any tagging +% activities, e.g., when we are doing trial typesetting that it is +% done several times. In such a case one must tag only the final +% version that is actually used, otherwise tagging structures are +% allowed which then do not end up in the PDF and confuse the +% mechanism. For this we have two commands that can be used in +% packages: \cs{SuspendTagging} and \cs{ResumeTagging}. They are +% available as part of the \LaTeX{} kernel, so that they can be +% safely used in packages whether or not tagging is requested .They +% both take string argument that is used for debugging to easily +% identify why tagging was suspended or restarted, for example, in +% \pkg{tabularx} you find \verb=\SuspendTagging{tabularx}=. By default +% they two commands do nothing. +% +% TODO: the corresponding L3 layer commands should also have a dummy +% definition in the kernel! +% +% \DescribeMacro\UseTaggingSocket +% \DescribeMacro\tag_socket_use:n +% \DescribeMacro\tag_socket_use:nn +% To support tagging in packages we use sockets with names starting +% with \texttt{tagsupport/}. Usually, these sockets have exactly two +% plugs defined: +% \plug{noop} (when no tagging is requested or tagging is not wanted +% for some reason) and a second plug that enables the tagging. There +% may be more, e.g., tagging with special debugging, etc., but right +% now it is usually just on or off. +% +% Given that we sometimes have to suspend tagging, it would be fairly +% inefficient to put different plugs into these sockets whenever that +% happens. We therefore offer \cs{UseTaggingSocket} which is like +% \cs{UseSocket} except that the socket name is specified without +% \texttt{tagsupport/}, i.e., +% \begin{quote} +% \verb=\UseTaggingSocket{foo}= $\to$ +% \verb=\UseSocket{tagsupport/foo}= +% \end{quote} +% Beside being slightly shorter, the big advantage is that this way +% we can change \cs{UseTaggingSocket} to do nothing when tagging is +% suspended with \cs{SuspendTagging} instead of changing the plugs of +% the tagging support sockets back and forth. +% +% It is possible to use the tagging support sockets with +% \cs{UseSocket} directly, but in this case the socket remains active +% if \cs{SuspendTagging} is in force. There my be reasons for doing +% that but in general we expect to always use \cs{UseTaggingSocket}. +% +% The L3 programming layer versions \cs{tag_socket_use:n} and +% \cs{tag_socket_use:nn} are slightly more efficient than +% \cs{UseTaggingSocket} because they do not have to determine how +% many arguments the socket takes when disabling it, so in code that +% is using the L3 programming layer we recommend to use them instead +% of the CamelCase command. +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\SuspendTagging,\ResumeTagging} +% +% In the kernel, these two commands get dummy definitions so that +% they can be used without harm in packages. The real definition is +% used when tagging gets enabled. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_eq:NN \SuspendTagging \use_none:n +\cs_new_eq:NN \ResumeTagging \use_none:n +% \end{macrocode} +% +% A simplified version of this defnition should move to +% \pkg{tagpdf} and dropped here, eventually. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{ + \cs_if_exist:NT \tag_stop:n + { + \cs_set:Npn \SuspendTagging #1 { +% \end{macrocode}% +% This stops tagging and also disables all tagging sockets so we are done. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tag_stop:n {#1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \cs_set:Npn \ResumeTagging #1 { \tag_start:n {#1} } + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\tag_socket_use:n, +% \tag_socket_use:nn, +% \UseTaggingSocket, +% } +% Again this is not the final definition for the kernel; it is just +% a version to get going while some parts of the kernel support are +% still missing. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AddToHook{begindocument}[kernel]{ + \cs_if_exist:NF \tag_if_active:T + { + \prg_new_conditional:Npnn \tag_if_active: { p , T , TF, F } + { \prg_return_false: } + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Dummy definitions in the kernel. +% These definitions will get updated in \pkg{tagpdf}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag_socket_use:n #1 { } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tag_socket_use:nn #1#2 { } +% \end{macrocode} +% The default in the kernel is just to get rid of the argument: +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \UseTaggingSocket #1 { + \int_case:nnF + { \int_use:c { c__socket_tagsupport/#1_args_int } } + { + 0 \prg_do_nothing: + 1 \use_none:n + 2 \use_none:nn +% \end{macrocode} +% We do not expect tagging sockets with more than one or two +% arguments, so for now we only provide those. +% \begin{macrocode} + } + \ERRORusetaggingsocket % that should get a proper error message +} +\ExplSyntaxOff +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \subsection{Tagging support for table/tabular packages} +% +% The code uses a number of sockets to inject the tagging +% commands. These can be easily set to a noop-plug in case the +% automated tagging is not wanted. +% +% \begin{socketdecl}{tagsupport/tbl/cell/begin, +% tagsupport/tbl/cell/end, +% tagsupport/tbl/pcell/end, +% tagsupport/tbl/pcell/end, +% tagsupport/tbl/row/begin, +% tagsupport/tbl/row/end, +% } +% At first sockets for the begin and end of cells and table rows: +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/cell/begin}{0} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/cell/end}{0} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/row/begin}{0} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/row/end}{0} +% \end{macrocode} +% Multi-line cells have their own sockets (as they start out in +% vertical mode and need different treatment). +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/pcell/begin}{0} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/pcell/end}{0} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{socketdecl} +% +% \begin{socketdecl}{tagsupport/tbl/init} +% This socket should be at the begin of the table, inside a group. +% It is used for settings such as disabling para-tagging inside the +% table. This socket +% can perhaps be merged later into the begin-sockets. +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/init}{0} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{socketdecl} +% +% +% \begin{socketdecl}{tagsupport/tbl/finalize} +% To fine tune the structure (change cells to header cells, remove +% unwanted structures, move a foot to the end, etc.). We also need a +% socket that is executed at the end of the table but \emph{before} +% all the variables are restored to the outer or default values. +% The code in the socket can make assignments, but probably +% shouldn't do typesetting and not write whatsits. +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/finalize}{0} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{socketdecl} +% + + +% \begin{socketdecl}{tagsupport/tbl/colspan} +% This socket is used to manage spanning cells, e.g., a +% \cs{multicolumn}. It expects one argument (the number of cells +% spanned) and if tagging is enabled set appropriate tag attributes +% in the background. We probably need a similar socket for row +% spans eventually. +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/colspan}{1} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{socketdecl} +% + + +% \begin{socketdecl}{tagsupport/tbl/hmode/begin, +% tagsupport/tbl/hmode/end, +% tagsupport/tbl/vmode/begin, +% tagsupport/tbl/vmode/end +% } +% +% These sockets are used in the begin and end code of environments, +% to allow a fast enabling and disabling of the tagging. We +% distinguish between tables that can be used inside paragraphs and +% standalone tables such as \env{longtable} that are always in +% vertical mode. +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/hmode/begin}{0} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/hmode/end}{0} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/vmode/begin}{0} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/vmode/end}{0} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{socketdecl} +% +% +% +% \begin{socketdecl}{tagsupport/tbl/longtable/init, +% tagsupport/tbl/longtable/finalize} +% \env{longtable} needs its own sockets to fine tune the structure. +% Simply switching the plug in the previous socket interferes with +% enabling/disabling the tagging. +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/longtable/init}{0} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/longtable/finalize}{0} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{socketdecl} +% +% \begin{socketdecl}{tagsupport/tbl/longtable/head, +% tagsupport/tbl/longtable/foot} +% Header and footer boxes need special handling because they are repeatedly +% used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/longtable/head}{0} +\NewSocket{tagsupport/tbl/longtable/foot}{0} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{socketdecl} +% +% +% +% +% +% \section{For lttab.dtx parked here for now} +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=tbl> +\ExplSyntaxOn +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsection{Variables for row, column and span counting} +% +% This part needs a decision on names for various integer registers +% as well as a decision if those should be also made available for +% \LaTeXe{}-style packages in form of 2e names and or as +% non-internals for the L3 programming layer. +% +% At the moment they are all internal but this probably has to change. +% +% \begin{macro}{ +% \g_@@_col_int, +% \g_@@_row_int, +% \g_@@_span_tl, +% \g_@@_table_cols_tl} +% +% \cs{g_@@_row_int} holds the current row number in the table. The +% value \texttt{0} means we haven't yet processed the table +% preamble (or in case of longtable are just in front of the next +% chunk to be processed). It is incremented by every \cs{cr} +% including the one ending the table preamble. +% +% TODO: due to the gymnastics needed inside the longtable code the +% row counter is directly exposed there rather than hidden by +% interfaces. This needs changing when it is decided how to manage +% these counters. +% +% \cs{g_@@_col_int} holds the current column number. The value +% \texttt{0} means we have not yet started the table or just finished a table row +% (with \verb=\\= typically); any other positive value means we +% are currently typesetting a cell in that column in some row +% (denoted by the \cs{g_@@_row_int}). +% +% In a \cs{multicolumn} it holds the column number of the first +% spanned column and \cs{g_@@_span_tl} the info how many cells are +% spanned. +% +% \cs{g_@@_span_tl} is normally \texttt{1} except in a +% \cs{multicolumn} cell. +% \begin{macrocode} +\int_new:N \g_@@_col_int +\int_new:N \g_@@_row_int +\tl_new:N \g_@@_span_tl +\tl_new:N \g_@@_table_cols_tl + +\tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_span_tl {1} +\tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_table_cols_tl {0} % indicates outer level +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_saved_col_tl,\l_@@_saved_row_tl, +% \l_@@_saved_span_tl,\l_@@_saved_table_cols_tl} +% +% Saving the outer values if we are nesting tables is necessary (as +% the above variables are globally altered). For this we always use +% token lists because they don't change and we do not need to blow +% additional integer registers. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_saved_col_tl +\tl_new:N \l_@@_saved_row_tl +\tl_new:N \l_@@_saved_span_tl +\tl_new:N \l_@@_saved_table_cols_tl + +\tl_set:Nn \l_@@_saved_col_tl{0} +\tl_set:Nn \l_@@_saved_row_tl{0} +\tl_set:Nn \l_@@_saved_span_tl{1} +\tl_set:Nn \l_@@_saved_table_cols_tl{0} % indicates outer level +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\g_@@_missingcells_int} +% This will contain the number of missing cells in a row: +% \begin{macrocode} +\int_new:N \g_@@_missing_cells_int +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% +% \subsection{Tracing/debugging} +% +% \begin{macro}{\DebugTablesOn,\DebugTablesOff} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\DebugTablesOn{ + \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_trace:n \typeout +} +\def\DebugTablesOff{ + \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_trace:n \use_none:n +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_trace:n \use_none:n +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Interface commands} +% +% All interface commands for the cell number determination have to be +% public on some level because they are needed in other packages as +% well, e.g., longtable. We may or may not also want to provide 2e +% style names for them. +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_update_cell_data:} +% Updating cell data in columns after the first means we have to +% increment the \cs{g_@@_col_int} by the span count of the previous +% cell (in case it was a \cs{multicolumn}) and then reset the +% \cs{g_@@_span_tl} to one (as the default). +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tbl_update_cell_data: { + \int_gadd:Nn \g_@@_col_int { \g_@@_span_tl } + \tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_span_tl {1} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_count_table_cols:} +% Current implementation of \cs{@mkpream} uses the scratch counter +% \cs{count@} to keep track of the number of toks registers it needs +% (2 per column), but this can't be used as it counts also +% insertions made with \verb+!{}+ and \verb+@{}+. +% So similar as does longtable for \cs{LT@cols} we count the +% numbers of ampersands instead. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \tbl_count_table_cols: { + \seq_set_split:NnV\l_@@_tmpa_seq {&}\@preamble + \tl_gset:Ne \g_@@_table_cols_tl { \seq_count:N \l_@@_tmpa_seq } + \@@_trace:n { ==>~ Table~ has~ \g_@@_table_cols_tl \space columns } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_tmpa_seq} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\seq_new:N \l_@@_tmpa_seq +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_count_missing_cells:n} +% +% We might have the situation that some table package has not +% implemented the \cs{tbl_count_table_cols:} in which case +% \cs{g_@@_table_cols_tl} would always be zero and we would get an +% error below when we try to determine the missing cells, so bypass +% that calculation if we aren't doing tagging (there the packages +% should have the proper code added). Recall that this is code, +% that is called by \verb=\\= and an old table packagee might rely +% on whatever the \LaTeX{} kernel offers here. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \tbl_count_missing_cells:n #1 { + \tag_if_active:T { + \int_compare:nNnT \g_@@_col_int > 0 + { + \int_gset:Nn \g_@@_missing_cells_int + { + \g_@@_table_cols_tl + - \g_@@_col_int + - \g_@@_span_tl + + 1 + } + \int_compare:nNnT \g_@@_missing_cells_int < 0 \ERRORmissingcells % should not happen + \@@_trace:n{==>~ + (#1)~ + This~ row~ needs~ + \int_use:N \g_@@_missing_cells_int \space + additional~ cell(s) + } + } + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_save_outer_table_cols:} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tbl_save_outer_table_cols: { + \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_saved_table_cols_tl \g_@@_table_cols_tl +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_init_cell_data_for_table:} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tbl_init_cell_data_for_table: { + \tl_set:No \l_@@_saved_col_tl {\int_use:N \g_@@_col_int } + \tl_set:No \l_@@_saved_row_tl {\int_use:N \g_@@_row_int } + \tl_set_eq:NN \l_@@_saved_span_tl \g_@@_span_tl +% + \@@_trace:n { ==>~ saved~cell~data:~ + \l_@@_saved_row_tl, + \l_@@_saved_col_tl, + \l_@@_saved_span_tl \space + ( + \int_compare:nNnTF \l_@@_saved_table_cols_tl = 0 + { outer~ level } + { max:~ \l_@@_saved_table_cols_tl } + ) + } +% \end{macrocode} +% These are the initial values when starting a table: +% \begin{macrocode} + \int_gzero:N \g_@@_row_int + \int_gzero:N \g_@@_col_int + \tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_span_tl {1} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_update_cell_data_for_next_row:} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tbl_update_cell_data_for_next_row: { + \int_gincr:N \g_@@_row_int % this row about to start + \int_gzero:N \g_@@_col_int % we are before first col +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_init_cell_data_for_row:} +% If we start processing a cell in the first column we set +% \cs{g_@@_col_int} to \texttt{1} as we are no longer "at" but "in" +% the first column. We also set \cs{g_@@_span_tl} to its default +% value (not spanning cells). +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tbl_init_cell_data_for_row: { + \int_gset:Nn \g_@@_col_int {1} + \tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_span_tl {1} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_if_row_was_started:T, +% \tbl_if_row_was_started:TF} +% We use \cs{g_@@_col_int} equal zero to indicate that we are just +% after a TR (i.e.n between rows or at the very beginning of the +% table). Using the row +% count is not so good as longtable may split the table in chunks. +% +% These conditionals have to be expandable (i.e., unprotected) as +% they are sometimes executed when \TeX{} is scanning inside a table. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \tbl_if_row_was_started:T { + \int_compare:nNnT \g_@@_col_int > 0 +} +\cs_new:Npn \tbl_if_row_was_started:TF { + \int_compare:nNnTF \g_@@_col_int > 0 +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_gzero_row_count:,\tbl_gincr_row_count:,\tbl_gdecr_row_count:} +% This here is basically a temporary interface. What it will be in +% the end depends on what we decide concerning exposing row and +% column counters, if they stay internal we need something like +% this here (perhaps using \texttt{gincr} etc, or perhaps some +% other names in the first place). +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tbl_gzero_row_count: { + \int_gzero:N \g_@@_row_int +} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tbl_gincr_row_count: { + \int_gincr:N \g_@@_row_int +} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tbl_gdecr_row_count: { + \int_gdecr:N \g_@@_row_int +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_inbetween_rows:} +% Again name is not really brilliant so far. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tbl_inbetween_rows: { + \int_gzero:N \g_@@_col_int +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_restore_outer_cell_data:} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tbl_restore_outer_cell_data: { + \int_gset:Nn \g_@@_col_int { \l_@@_saved_col_tl } + \int_gset:Nn \g_@@_row_int { \l_@@_saved_row_tl } + \tl_gset_eq:NN \g_@@_span_tl \l_@@_saved_span_tl + \tl_gset_eq:NN \g_@@_table_cols_tl \l_@@_saved_table_cols_tl + \@@_trace:n { ==>~ restored~cell~data:~ + \int_use:N \g_@@_row_int, + \int_use:N \g_@@_col_int, + \l_@@_saved_span_tl \space + ( + \int_compare:nNnTF \g_@@_table_cols_tl = 0 + { outer~ level } + { max:~ \g_@@_table_cols_tl } + ) + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_update_multicolumn_cell_data:n} +% This macro updates \cs{g_@@_col_int} and \cs{g_@@_span_tl} inside +% a \cs{multicolumn} and possibly calls the tagging socket +% \texttt{tbl/row/begin}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \tbl_update_multicolumn_cell_data:n #1 { +% \end{macrocode} +% We execute socket for tagging only if this \cs{multicolumn} +% replaces the preamble of the first column. In that case we also have +% to set \cs{g_@@_col_int} to 1 because this is no longer done in the +% preamble for the cell either. +% \begin{macrocode} + \int_compare:nNnTF \g_@@_col_int = 0 + { + \UseTaggingSocket{tbl/row/begin} + \int_gset:Nn \g_@@_col_int {1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% If we are in a later column we use \cs{g_@@_span_tl} from the +% previous column to update. +% \begin{macrocode} + { + \int_gadd:Nn \g_@@_col_int { \g_@@_span_tl } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we set the span value so that it can be use in the next column. +% \begin{macrocode} + \tl_gset:Nn \g_@@_span_tl {#1} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\tbl_crcr:n} +% This macro is used instead of the usual \cs{crcr} at the end of a +% table. It is deliberately defined without protection because it +% may get expanded by the scanning mechanism of low-level \TeX{} +% after a final \cs{cr} (aka \verb=\\=) in the table. In that case +% it shouldn't stop the expansion and the conditional inside will +% be false, thus it just vanishes without doing anything. If there +% are missing cells (in which case we also haven't see \cs{cr} yet) +% the macro \cs{tbl_count_missing_cells:n} is executed and +% then the row is finished with a final \cs{cr}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \tbl_crcr:n #1 { + \int_compare:nNnT \g_@@_col_int > 0 + { + \tbl_count_missing_cells:n {#1} + \cr + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOff +%<@@=> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% This is needed for \pkg{longtable} because \cs{refstepcounter} is +% setting up a target when \pkg{hyperref} is loaded and we don't +% want that in \pkg{longtable}. +% +% TODO: move to right .dtx file +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@kernel@refstepcounter\refstepcounter +% \end{macrocode} +% Prevent longtable patching by hyperref until hyperref does so automatically: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\hyper@nopatch@longtable{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% Should there be a module? +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<latexrelease>\NewModuleRelease{2024/06/01}{lttagging} +%<latexrelease> {Tagging support} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{lttagging}% +%<latexrelease> {Undo tagging support} +%<latexrelease> +%<latexrelease> +%<latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\EndModuleRelease +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%</2ekernel|latexrelease> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \Finale +% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttemplates.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttemplates.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7192359e726 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttemplates.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,2634 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright (C) 1999 Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley, David Carlisle +% Copyright (C) 2004-2010 Frank Mittelbach, The LaTeX Project +% Copyright (C) 2011-2024 +% The LaTeX Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2008 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% +% \iffalse +% +%%% From File: lttemplates.dtx +% +%<*driver> +% \fi +\ProvidesFile{lttemplates.dtx} + [2024-04-17 v1.0c LaTeX Kernel (Prototype document functions)] +% \iffalse +\documentclass{l3doc} +\GetFileInfo{lttemplates.dtx} +\begin{document} + \DocInput{lttemplates.dtx} +\end{document} +%</driver> +% \fi +% +% \title{The \texttt{lttemplates.dtx} code\thanks{This file has version +% \fileversion\ dated \filedate, \copyright\ \LaTeX\ +% Project.}} +% \author{^^A +% Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley, David Carlisle, \LaTeX{} Project\thanks +% {^^A +% E-mail: +% \href{mailto:latex-team@latex-project.org} +% {latex-team@latex-project.org}^^A +% }^^A +% } +% +% \maketitle +% +% \section{Introduction} +% +% There are three broad \enquote{layers} between putting down ideas into +% a source file and ending up with a typeset document. These layers of +% document writing are +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item authoring of the text with mark-up; +% \item document layout design; +% \item implementation (with \TeX{} programming) of the design. +% \end{enumerate} +% We write the text as an author, and we see the visual output of the design +% after the document is generated; the \TeX{} implementation in the middle is +% the glue between the two. +% +% \LaTeX{}'s greatest success has been to standardise a system of mark-up that +% balances the trade-off between ease of reading and ease of writing to suit +% almost all forms of technical writing. It's +% other original strength was a good background in typographical design; while +% the standard \LaTeXe{} classes look somewhat dated now in terms of their +% visual design, their typography is generally sound (barring the occasional +% minor faults). +% +% However, \LaTeXe{} has always lacked a standard approach to customising +% the visual design of a document. Changing the looks of the standard classes +% involved either: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Creating a new version of the implementation code of the class and +% editing it. +% \item Loading one of the many packages to customise certain elements of +% the standard classes. +% \item Loading a completely different document class, such as +% \textsf{KOMA-Script} or \textsf{memoir}, that allows easy customisation. +% \end{itemize} +% All three of these approaches have their drawbacks and learning curves. +% +% The idea behind \pkg{lttemplates} is to cleanly separate the three layers +% introduced at the beginning of this section, so that document authors who +% are not programmers can easily change the design of their documents. +% \pkg{lttemplates} also makes it easier for \LaTeX{} programmers to provide +% their own customisations on top of a pre-existing class. +% +% \section{What is a document?} +% +% Besides the textual content of the words themselves, the source file +% of a document contains mark-up elements that add structure to the +% document. These elements include sectional divisions, figure/table +% captions, lists of various sorts, theorems/proofs, and so on. +% The list will be different for every document that can be written. +% +% Each element can be represented logically without worrying about the +% formatting, with mark-up such as \cs{section}, \cs{caption}, +% |\begin{enumerate}| and so on. The output of each one of these +% document elements will be a typeset representation of the information +% marked up, and the visual arrangement and design of these elements +% can vary widely in producing a variety of desired outcomes. +% +% For each type of document element, there may be design variations that +% contain the same sort of information but present it in slightly +% different ways. For example, the difference between a numbered and an +% unnumbered section, \cs{section} and |\section*|, or the difference +% between an itemised list or an enumerated list. +% +% There are three distinct layers in the definition of +% \enquote{a document} at this level +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item semantic elements such as the ideas of sections and lists; +% \item a set of design solutions for representing these elements +% visually; +% \item specific variations for these designs that represent the +% elements in the document. +% \end{enumerate} +% In the parlance of the template system, these are called types, +% templates, and instances, and they are discussed below in sections +% \ref{sec:types}, \ref{sec:templates}, and~\ref{sec:instances}, +% respectively. +% +% \section {Types, templates, and instances} +% +% By formally declaring documents to be composed of mark-up elements +% grouped into types, which are interpreted and typeset with a set of +% templates, each of which has one or more instances with which to +% compose each and every semantic unit of the text, we can cleanly +% separate the components of document construction. +% +% All of the structures provided by the template system are global, +% and do not respect \TeX{} grouping. +% +% \section{Template types} +% \label{sec:types} +% +% An \emph{template type} (sometimes just \enquote{type}) is an +% abstract idea of a document element that takes a fixed number of +% arguments corresponding to the information from the document author +% that it is representing. A sectioning type, for example, might take +% three inputs: \enquote{title}, \enquote{short title}, and +% \enquote{label}. +% +% Any given document class will define which types are to be +% used in the document, and any template of a given type can be +% used to generate an instance for the type. (Of course, different +% templates will produce different typeset representations, but the +% underlying content will be the same.) +% +% \begin{function}{\NewTemplateType} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{NewTemplateType} \Arg{template type} \Arg{no. of args} +% \end{syntax} +% This function defines an \meta{template type} taking +% \meta{number of arguments}, where the \meta{type} is an +% abstraction as discussed above. For example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \NewTemplateType{sectioning}{3} +% \end{verbatim} +% creates a type \enquote{sectioning}, where each use of that +% type will need three arguments. +% \end{function} +% +% \section{Templates} +% \label{sec:templates} +% +% A \emph{template} is a generalised design solution for representing +% the information of a specified type. Templates that do the same +% thing, but in different ways, are grouped together by their type +% and given separate names. There are two important parts to a template: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item the parameters it takes to vary the design it is producing; +% \item the implementation of the design. +% \end{itemize} +% As a document author or designer does not care about the +% implementation but rather only the interface to the template, these two +% aspects of the template definition are split into two independent +% declarations, \cs{DeclareTemplateInterface} and +% \cs{DeclareTemplateCode}. +% +% \begin{function}{\DeclareTemplateInterface} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{DeclareTemplateInterface} +% ~~\Arg{type} \Arg{template} \Arg{no.~of args} +% ~~\Arg{key list} +% \end{syntax} +% A \meta{template} interface is declared for a particular +% \meta{type}, where the \meta{number of arguments} must +% agree with the type declaration. The interface itself is +% defined by the \meta{key list}, which is itself a key--value list +% taking a specialized format: +% \begin{quotation} +% \obeylines +% \noindent +% \meta{key1}~":"~\meta{key type1}~"," +% \meta{key2}~":"~\meta{key type2}~"," +% \meta{key3}~":"~\meta{key type3}~"="~\meta{default3}~"," +% \meta{key4}~":"~\meta{key type4}~"="~\meta{default4}~"," +% \ldots +% \end{quotation} +% Each \meta{key} name should consist of \textsc{ascii} characters, +% with the exception of |,|, |=| and \verb*| |. The recommended form +% for key names is to use lower case letters, with dashes to separate +% out different parts. Spaces are ignored in key names, so they can be +% included or missed out at will. Each \meta{key} must have a +% \meta{key type}, which defined the type of input that the \meta{key} +% requires. A full list of key types is given in +% Table~\ref{tab:key-types}. Each key may have a \meta{default} +% value, which will be used in by the template if the \meta{key} is +% not set explicitly. The \meta{default} should be of the correct +% form to be accepted by the \meta{key type} of the \meta{key}: this +% is not checked by the code. Expressions for numerical values are +% evaluated when the template is used, thus for example values given +% in terms of |em| or |ex| will be set respecting the prevailing font. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{table} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{>{\ttfamily}ll} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{1}{l}{Key-type} & Description of input \\ +% \midrule +% boolean & \texttt{true} or \texttt{false} \\ +% choice\Arg{choices} +% & A list of pre-defined \meta{choices} \\ +% commalist & A comma-separated list \\ +% function\Arg{$N$} +% & A function definition with $N$ arguments +% ($N$ from $0$ to $9$) \\ +% instance\Arg{name} +% & An instance of type \meta{name} \\ +% integer & An integer or integer expression \\ +% length & A fixed length \\ +% muskip & A math length with shrink and stretch components \\ +% real & A real (floating point) value \\ +% skip & A length with shrink and stretch components \\ +% tokenlist & A token list: any text or commands \\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \caption{Key-types for defining template interfaces with +% \cs{DeclareTemplateInterface}.} +% \label{tab:key-types} +% \end{table} +% +% \begin{function}{\KeyValue} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{KeyValue} \Arg{key name} +% \end{syntax} +% There are occasions where the default (or value) for one key +% should be taken from another. The \cs{KeyValue} function can be +% used to transfer this information without needing to know the +% internal implementation of the key: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \DeclareTemplateInterface { type } { template } { no. of args } +% { +% key-name-1 : key-type = value , +% key-name-2 : key-type = \KeyValue { key-name-1 }, +% ... +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\DeclareTemplateCode} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{DeclareTemplateCode} +% ~~\Arg{type} \Arg{template} \Arg{no.~of args} +% ~~\Arg{key bindings} \Arg{code} +% \end{syntax} +% The relationship between a templates keys and the internal +% implementation is created using the \cs{DeclareTemplateCode} +% function. As with \cs{DeclareTemplateInterface}, the +% \meta{template} name is given along with the \meta{type} +% and \meta{number of arguments} required. The \meta{key bindings} +% argument is a key--value list which specifies the relationship +% between each \meta{key} of the template interface with an +% underlying\meta{variable}. +% +% \begin{quotation} +% \obeylines +% \noindent +% \meta{key1}~"="~\meta{variable1}, +% \meta{key2}~"="~\meta{variable2}, +% \meta{key3}~"="~global~\meta{variable3}, +% \meta{key4}~"="~global~\meta{variable4}, +% \ldots +% \end{quotation} +% With the exception of the choice, code and function key types, +% the \meta{variable} here should be the name of an existing +% \LaTeX3 register. As illustrated, the key word \enquote{global} +% may be included in the listing to indicate that the \meta{variable} +% should be assigned globally. A full list of variable bindings is +% given in Table~\ref{tab:key-vars}. +% +% The \meta{code} argument of \cs{DeclareTemplateCode} is used +% as the replacement text for the template when it is used, either +% directly or as an instance. This may therefore accept arguments +% |#1|, |#2|, \emph{etc}.~as detailed by the \meta{number of arguments} +% taken by the type. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{table} +% \centering +% \begin{tabular}{>{\ttfamily}ll} +% \toprule +% \multicolumn{1}{l}{Key-type} & Description of binding \\ +% \midrule +% \ & Boolean variable, \emph{e.g}.~\cs{l_tmpa_bool} \\ +% choice +% & List of choice implementations +% (see Section~\ref{sec:choices-key}) \\ +% commalist & Comma list, \emph{e.g}.~\cs{l_tmpa_clist} \\ +% function +% & Function taking $N$ arguments, \emph{e.g}.~\cs{use_i:nn} \\ +% instance \\ +% integer & Integer variable, \emph{e.g}.~\cs{l_tmpa_int} \\ +% length & Dimension variable, \emph{e.g}.~\cs{l_tmpa_dim} \\ +% muskip & Muskip variable, \emph{e.g}.~\cs{l_tmpa_muskip} \\ +% real & Floating-point variable, \emph{e.g}.~\cs{l_tmpa_fp} \\ +% skip & Skip variable, \emph{e.g}.~\cs{l_tmpa_skip} \\ +% tokenlist & Token list variable, \emph{e.g}.~\cs{l_tmpa_tl} \\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \caption{Bindings required for different key types when defining +% template implementations with \cs{DeclareTemplateCode}. Apart +% from \texttt{code}, \texttt{choice} and \texttt{function} +% all of these accept the key word \texttt{global} to carry +% out a global assignment.} +% \label{tab:key-vars} +% \end{table} +% +% \begin{function}{\AssignTemplateKeys} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{AssignTemplateKeys} +% \end{syntax} +% In the final argument of \cs{DeclareTemplateCode} the assignment of +% keys defined by the template may be delayed by including the command +% \cs{AssignTemplateKeys}. If this is \emph{not} present, keys are assigned +% immediately before the template code. If \cs{AssignTemplateKeys} is +% present, assignment is delayed until this point. Note that the +% command must be \emph{directly} present in the code, not placed +% within a nested command/macro. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\DeclareTemplateCopy} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{DeclareTemplateCopy} +% ~~\Arg{type} \Arg{template2} \Arg{template1} +% \end{syntax} +% Copies \meta{template1} of \meta{type} to a new name \meta{template2}: +% the copy can then be edited independent of teh original. +% \end{function} +% +% \section{Multiple choices} +% \label{sec:choices-key} +% +% The \texttt{choice} key type implements multiple choice input. At the +% interface level, only the list of valid choices is needed: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \DeclareTemplateInterface { foo } { bar } { 0 } +% { key-name : choice { A, B, C } } +% \end{verbatim} +% where the choices are given as a comma-list (which must therefore +% be wrapped in braces). A default value can also be given: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \DeclareTemplateInterface { foo } { bar } { 0 } +% { key-name : choice { A, B, C } = A } +% \end{verbatim} +% +% At the implementation level, each choice is associated with code, +% using a nested key--value list. +% \begin{verbatim} +% \DeclareTemplateCode { foo } { bar } { 0 } +% { +% key-name = +% { +% A = Code-A , +% B = Code-B , +% C = Code-C +% } +% } +% { ... } +% \end{verbatim} +% The two choice lists should match, but in the implementation a +% special \texttt{unknown} choice is also available. This can be used +% to ignore values and implement an \enquote{else} branch: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \DeclareTemplateCode { foo } { bar } { 0 } +% { +% key-name = +% { +% A = Code-A , +% B = Code-B , +% C = Code-C , +% unknown = Else-code +% } +% } +% { ... } +% \end{verbatim} +% The \texttt{unknown} entry must be the last one given, and should +% \emph{not} be listed in the interface part of the template. +% +% For keys which accept the values \texttt{true} and \texttt{false} +% both the boolean and choice key types can be used. As template +% interfaces are intended to prompt clarity at the design level, the +% boolean key type should be favoured, with the choice type reserved +% for keys which take arbitrary values. +% +% \section{Instances} +% \label{sec:instances} +% +% After a template is defined it still needs to be put to use. The +% parameters that it expects need to be defined before it can be used in +% a document. Every time a template has parameters given to it, an +% \emph{instance} is created, and this is the code that ends up in the +% document to perform the typesetting of whatever pieces of information +% are input into it. +% +% For example, a template might say \enquote{here is a section with or +% without a number that might be centred or left aligned and print its +% contents in a certain font of a certain size, with a bit of a gap +% before and after it} whereas an instance declares \enquote{this is a +% section with a number, which is centred and set in $12\,\text{pt}$ +% italic with a $10\,\text{pt}$ skip before and a +% $12\,\text{pt}$ skip after it}. Therefore, an instance is just a +% frozen version of a template with specific settings as chosen by the +% designer. +% +% \begin{function}{\DeclareInstance} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{DeclareInstance} +% ~~\Arg{type} \Arg{instance} \Arg{template} \Arg{parameters} +% \end{syntax} +% This function uses a \meta{template} for an \meta{type} +% to create an \meta{instance}. The \meta{instance} will be set +% up using the \meta{parameters}, which will set some of the +% \meta{keys} in the \meta{template}. +% +% As a practical example, consider a type for document sections +% (which might include chapters, parts, sections, \emph{etc}.), which +% is called \texttt{sectioning}. One possible template for this +% type might be called \texttt{basic}, and one instance of this +% template would be a numbered section. The instance declaration might +% read: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \DeclareInstance { sectioning } { section-num } { basic } +% { +% numbered = true , +% justification = center , +% font =\normalsize\itshape , +% before-skip = 10pt , +% after-skip = 12pt , +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% Of course, the key names here are entirely imaginary, but illustrate +% the general idea of fixing some settings. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\IfInstanceExistsT, \IfInstanceExisstF, \IfInstanceExistsTF} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{IfInstanceExistsTF} \Arg{type} \Arg{instance} \Arg{true code} \Arg{false code} +% \end{syntax} +% Tests if the named \meta{instance} of a \meta{type} exists, and +% then inserts the appropriate code into the input stream. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\DeclareInstanceCopy} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{DeclareInstanceCopy} +% ~~\Arg{type} \Arg{instance2} \Arg{instance1} +% \end{syntax} +% Copies the \meta{values} for \meta{instance1} for an +% \meta{type} to \meta{instance2}. +% \end{function} +% +% \section{Document interface} +% +% After the instances have been chosen, document commands must be +% declared to use those instances in the document. \cs{UseInstance} +% calls instances directly, and this command should be used internally +% in document-level mark-up. +% +% \begin{function}{\UseInstance} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{UseInstance} +% ~~\Arg{type} \Arg{instance} \meta{arguments} +% \end{syntax} +% Uses an \meta{instance} of the \meta{type}, which will require +% \meta{arguments} as determined by the number specified for the +% \meta{type}. The \meta{instance} must have been declared +% before it can be used, otherwise an error is raised. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\UseTemplate} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{UseTemplate} \Arg{type} \Arg{template} +% ~~\Arg{settings} \meta{arguments} +% \end{syntax} +% Uses the \meta{template} of the specified \meta{type}, +% applying the \meta{settings} and absorbing \meta{arguments} as +% detailed by the \meta{type} declaration. This in effect +% is the same as creating an instance using \cs{DeclareInstance} +% and immediately using it with \cs{UseInstance}, but without the +% instance having any further existence. It is therefore useful where +% a template needs to be used once. +% +% This function can also be used as the argument to \texttt{instance} +% key types: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \DeclareInstance { type } { template } { instance } +% { +% instance-key = +% \UseTemplate { type2 } { template2 } { <settings> } +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% \end{function} +% +% \section{Changing existing definitions} +% +% Template parameters may be assigned specific defaults for instances +% to use if the instance declaration doesn't explicit set those +% parameters. In some cases, the document designer will wish to edit +% these defaults to allow them to \enquote{cascade} to the instances. +% The alternative would be to set each parameter identically for each +% instance declaration, a tedious and error-prone process. +% +% \begin{function}{\EditTemplateDefaults} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{EditTemplateDefaults} +% ~~\Arg{type} \Arg{template} \Arg{new defaults} +% \end{syntax} +% Edits the \meta{defaults} for a \meta{template} for an +% \meta{type}. The \meta{new defaults}, given as a key--value +% list, replace the existing defaults for the \meta{template}. This +% means that the change will apply to instances declared after the +% editing, but that instances which have already been created are +% unaffected. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\EditInstance} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{EditInstance} +% ~~\Arg{type} \Arg{instance} \Arg{new values} +% \end{syntax} +% Edits the \meta{values} for an \meta{instance} for an +% \meta{type}. The \meta{new values}, given as a key--value +% list, replace the existing values for the \meta{instance}. This +% function is complementary to \cs{EditTemplateDefaults}: +% \cs{EditInstance} changes a single instance while leaving the +% template untouched. +% \end{function} +% +% \section{\emph{Ad hoc} adjustment of templates} +% +% \begin{function}{\SetTemplateKeys} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{SetTemplateKeys} \Arg{type} \Arg{template} \Arg{keyvals} +% \end{syntax} +% At point of use it may be useful to apply changed to individual instances. +% This is supported as each template key is made available for adjustment +% using \cs{SetTemplateKeys}. +% \end{function} +% +% For example, after +% \begin{verbatim} +% \NewTypeType{MyObj}{0} +% \DeclareTemplateInterface{MyObj}{TemplateA}{0} +% { +% akey: tokenlist , +% bkey: function{2} +% } +% \DeclareTemplateCode{MyObj}{TemplateA}{0} +% { +% akey = SomeTokens , +% bkey = \func:nn , +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% the template keys could be adjusted in an \emph{ad hoc} fashion using +% \begin{verbatim} +% \SetTemplateKeys{MyObj}{TemplateA} +% { +% akey = OtherTokens , +% bkey = \AltFunc:nn +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \section{Getting information about templates and instances} +% +% \begin{function}{\ShowInstanceValues} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{ShowInstanceValues} \Arg{type} \Arg{instance} +% \end{syntax} +% Shows the \meta{values} for an \meta{instance} of the given +% \meta{type} at the terminal. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\ShowTemplateCode} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{ShowTemplateCode} \Arg{type} \Arg{template} +% \end{syntax} +% Shows the \meta{code} of a \meta{template} for an \meta{type} +% in the terminal. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\ShowTemplateDefaults} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{ShowTemplateDefaults} \Arg{type} \Arg{template} +% \end{syntax} +% Shows the \meta{default} values of a \meta{template} for an +% \meta{type} in the terminal. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\ShowTemplateInterface} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{ShowTemplateInterface} \Arg{type} \Arg{template} +% \end{syntax} +% Shows the \meta{keys} and associated \meta{key types} of a +% \meta{template} for an \meta{type} in the terminal. +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}{\ShowTemplateVariables} +% \begin{syntax} +% \cs{ShowTemplateVariables} \Arg{type} \Arg{template} +% \end{syntax} +% Shows the \meta{variables} and associated \meta{keys} of a +% \meta{template} for an \meta{type} in the terminal. Note that +% \texttt{code} and \texttt{choice} keys do not map directly to variables +% but to arbitrary code. For \texttt{choice} keys, each valid choice +% is shown as a separate entry in the list, with the key name and choice +% separated by a space, for example +% \begin{verbatim} +% Template 'example' of type 'example' has variable mapping: +% > demo unknown => \def \demo {?} +% > demo c => \def \demo {c} +% > demo b => \def \demo {b} +% > demo a => \def \demo {a}. +% \end{verbatim} +% would be shown for a choice key \texttt{demo} with valid choices +% \texttt{a}, \texttt{b} and \texttt{c}, plus code for an \texttt{unknown} +% branch. +% \end{function} +% +% \MaybeStop{\setlength\IndexMin{200pt}\PrintIndex} +% +% \section{The implementation} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=template> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*2ekernel> +\message{templates,} +%</2ekernel> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*2ekernel|latexrelease> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOn +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<latexrelease>\NewModuleRelease{2024/06/01}{lttemplates} +%<latexrelease> {Prototype~document~commands}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Variables and constants} +% +% \begin{variable} +% { +% \c_@@_code_root_tl , +% \c_@@_defaults_root_tl , +% \c_@@_instances_root_tl , +% \c_@@_keytypes_root_tl , +% \c_@@_key_order_root_tl , +% \c_@@_restrict_root_tl , +% \c_@@_values_root_tl , +% \c_@@_vars_root_tl +% } +% So that literal values are kept to a minimum. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_code_root_tl { template~code~>~ } +\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_defaults_root_tl { template~defaults~>~ } +\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_instances_root_tl { template~instance~>~ } +\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_keytypes_root_tl { template~key~types~>~ } +\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_key_order_root_tl { template~key~order~>~ } +\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_values_root_tl { template~values~>~ } +\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_vars_root_tl { template~vars~>~ } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable}{\c_@@_keytypes_arg_seq} +% A list of keytypes which also need additional data (an argument), +% used to parse the keytype correctly. +% \begin{macrocode} +\seq_const_from_clist:Nn \c_@@_keytypes_arg_seq + { choice , function , instance } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable}{\g_@@_type_prop} +% For storing types and the associated number of arguments. +% \begin{macrocode} +\prop_new:N \g_@@_type_prop +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_assignments_tl} +% When creating an instance, the assigned values are collected here. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_assignments_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{macro}{\l_@@_default_tl} +% The default value for a key is recovered here from the property list +% in which it is stored. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_default_tl +% \end{macrocode} +%\ end{macro} +% +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_error_bool} +% A flag for errors to be carried forward. +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \l_@@_error_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable}{\l_@@_global_bool} +% Used to indicate that assignments should be global. +% \begin{macrocode} +\bool_new:N \l_@@_global_bool +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable} +% { +% \l_@@_key_name_tl , +% \l_@@_keytype_tl , +% \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl , +% \l_@@_value_tl , +% \l_@@_var_tl +% } +% When defining each key in a template, the name and type of the key +% need to be separated and stored. Any argument needed by the +% keytype is also stored separately. +% \begin{macrocode} +\tl_new:N \l_@@_key_name_tl +\tl_new:N \l_@@_keytype_tl +\tl_new:N \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl +\tl_new:N \l_@@_value_tl +\tl_new:N \l_@@_var_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable} +% { +% \l_@@_keytypes_prop , +% \l_@@_key_order_seq , +% \l_@@_values_prop , +% \l_@@_vars_prop +% } +% To avoid needing too many difficult-to-follow csname assignments, +% various scratch token registers are used to build up data, which is +% then transferred +% \begin{macrocode} +\prop_new:N \l_@@_keytypes_prop +\seq_new:N \l_@@_key_order_seq +\prop_new:N \l_@@_values_prop +\prop_new:N \l_@@_vars_prop +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable} +% { +% \l_@@_tmp_clist , +% \l_@@_tmp_dim , +% \l_@@_tmp_int , +% \l_@@_tmp_muskip , +% \l_@@_tmp_skip , +% \l_@@_tmp_tl +% } +% Scratch space. +% \begin{macrocode} +\clist_new:N \l_@@_tmp_clist +\dim_new:N \l_@@_tmp_dim +\int_new:N \l_@@_tmp_int +\muskip_new:N \l_@@_tmp_muskip +\skip_new:N \l_@@_tmp_skip +\tl_new:N \l_@@_tmp_tl +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable}{\s_@@_mark, \s_@@_stop} +% Internal scan marks. +% \begin{macrocode} +\scan_new:N \s_@@_mark +\scan_new:N \s_@@_stop +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{variable}{\q_@@_nil} +% Internal quarks. +% \begin{macrocode} +\quark_new:N \q_@@_nil +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{variable} +% +% \begin{macro}[pTF]{\@@_quark_if_nil:n} +% Branching quark conditional. +% \begin{macrocode} +\__kernel_quark_new_conditional:Nn \@@_quark_if_nil:N { F } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Testing existence and validity} +% +% There are a number of checks needed for either the existence of +% a type, template or instance. There are also some for the +% validity of a particular call. All of these are collected up here. +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_execute_if_arg_agree:nnT} +% A test agreement between the number of arguments for the template +% type and that specified when creating a template. This is not done as a +% separate conditional for efficiency and better error message +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_execute_if_arg_agree:nnT #1#2#3 + { + \prop_get:NnN \g_@@_type_prop {#1} \l_@@_tmp_tl + \int_compare:nNnTF {#2} = \l_@@_tmp_tl + {#3} + { + \msg_error:nneee { template } { argument-number-mismatch } + {#1} { \l_@@_tmp_tl } {#2} + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_execute_if_code_exist:nnT} +% A template is only fully declared if the code has been set up, +% which can be checked by looking for the template function itself. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_execute_if_code_exist:nnT #1#2#3 + { + \cs_if_exist:cTF { \c_@@_code_root_tl #1 / #2 } + {#3} + { \msg_error:nnnn { template } { no-template-code } {#1} {#2} } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro} +% {\@@_execute_if_keytype_exist:nT, \@@_execute_if_keytype_exist:VT} +% The test for valid keytypes looks for a function to set up the key, +% which is part of the \enquote{code} side of the template definition. +% This avoids having different lists for the two parts of the process. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_execute_if_keytype_exist:nT #1#2 + { + \cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_store_value_ #1 :n } + {#2} + { \msg_error:nnn { template } { unknown-keytype } {#1} } + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_execute_if_keytype_exist:nT { V } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_execute_if_type_exist:nT} +% To check that a particular type is valid. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_execute_if_type_exist:nT #1#2 + { + \prop_if_in:NnTF \g_@@_type_prop {#1} + {#2} + { \msg_error:nnn { template } { unknown-type } {#1} } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_execute_if_keys_exist:nnT} +% To check that the keys for a template have been set up before trying +% to create any code, a simple check for the correctly-named keytype +% property list. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_if_keys_exist:nnT #1#2#3 + { + \cs_if_exist:cTF { \c_@@_keytypes_root_tl #1 / #2 } + {#3} + { \msg_error:nnnn { template } { unknown-template } {#1} {#2} } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}[TF]{\@@_if_key_value:n, \@@_if_key_value:V} +% Tests for the first token in a string being \cs{KeyValue}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\prg_new_conditional:Npnn \@@_if_key_value:n #1 { T , F , TF } + { + \str_if_eq:noTF { \KeyValue } { \tl_head:w #1 \q_nil \q_stop } + \prg_return_true: + \prg_return_false: + } +\prg_generate_conditional_variant:Nnn \@@_if_key_value:n { V } { T , F , TF } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}[TF]{\@@_if_instance_exist:nn} +% Testing for an instance +% \begin{macrocode} +\prg_new_conditional:Npnn \@@_if_instance_exist:nn #1#2 { T, F, TF } + { + \cs_if_exist:cTF { \c_@@_instances_root_tl #1 / #2 } + \prg_return_true: + \prg_return_false: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_if_use_template:nTF} +% Tests for the first token in a string being \cs{UseTemplate}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\prg_new_conditional:Npnn \@@_if_use_template:n #1 { TF } + { + \str_if_eq:noTF { \UseTemplate } { \tl_head:w #1 \q_nil \q_stop } + \prg_return_true: + \prg_return_false: +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Saving and recovering property lists} +% +% The various property lists for templates have to be shuffled in +% and out of storage. +% +% \begin{macro} +% { +% \@@_store_defaults:nn , +% \@@_store_keytypes:nn , +% \@@_store_values:nn , +% \@@_store_vars:nn +% } +% The defaults and keytypes are transferred from the scratch property +% lists to the \enquote{proper} lists for the template being created. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_defaults:nn #1#2 + { + \debug_suspend: + \prop_gclear_new:c { \c_@@_defaults_root_tl #1 / #2 } + \prop_gset_eq:cN { \c_@@_defaults_root_tl #1 / #2 } + \l_@@_values_prop + \debug_resume: + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_keytypes:nn #1#2 + { + \debug_suspend: + \prop_if_exist:cTF { \c_@@_keytypes_root_tl #1 / #2 } + { + \msg_info:nnnn { template } { declare-template-interface } {#1} {#2} + \prop_gclear:c { \c_@@_keytypes_root_tl #1 / #2 } + } + { \prop_new:c { \c_@@_keytypes_root_tl #1 / #2 } } + \prop_gset_eq:cN { \c_@@_keytypes_root_tl #1 / #2 } + \l_@@_keytypes_prop + \seq_gclear_new:c { \c_@@_key_order_root_tl #1 / #2 } + \seq_gset_eq:cN { \c_@@_key_order_root_tl #1 / #2 } + \l_@@_key_order_seq + \debug_resume: + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_values:nn #1#2 + { + \debug_suspend: + \prop_clear_new:c { \c_@@_values_root_tl #1 / #2 } + \prop_set_eq:cN { \c_@@_values_root_tl #1 / #2 } + \l_@@_values_prop + \debug_resume: + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_vars:nn #1#2 + { + \debug_suspend: + \prop_gclear_new:c { \c_@@_vars_root_tl #1 / #2 } + \prop_gset_eq:cN { \c_@@_vars_root_tl #1 / #2 } + \l_@@_vars_prop + \debug_resume: + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro} +% { +% \@@_recover_defaults:nn , +% \@@_recover_keytypes:nn , +% \@@_recover_values:nn , +% \@@_recover_vars:nn +% } +% Recovering the stored data for a template is rather less complex +% than storing it. All that happens is the data is transferred from +% the permanent to the scratch storage. However, we need to check the +% scratch storage does exist. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_recover_defaults:nn #1#2 + { + \prop_if_exist:cTF + { \c_@@_defaults_root_tl #1 / #2 } + { + \prop_set_eq:Nc \l_@@_values_prop + { \c_@@_defaults_root_tl #1 / #2 } + } + { \prop_clear:N \l_@@_values_prop } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_recover_keytypes:nn #1#2 + { + \prop_if_exist:cTF + { \c_@@_keytypes_root_tl #1 / #2 } + { + \prop_set_eq:Nc \l_@@_keytypes_prop + { \c_@@_keytypes_root_tl #1 / #2 } + } + { \prop_clear:N \l_@@_keytypes_prop } + \seq_if_exist:cTF { \c_@@_key_order_root_tl #1 / #2 } + { + \seq_set_eq:Nc \l_@@_key_order_seq + { \c_@@_key_order_root_tl #1 / #2 } + } + { \seq_clear:N \l_@@_key_order_seq } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_recover_values:nn #1#2 + { + \prop_if_exist:cTF + { \c_@@_values_root_tl #1 / #2 } + { + \prop_set_eq:Nc \l_@@_values_prop + { \c_@@_values_root_tl #1 / #2 } + } + { \prop_clear:N \l_@@_values_prop } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_recover_vars:nn #1#2 + { + \prop_if_exist:cTF + { \c_@@_vars_root_tl #1 / #2 } + { + \prop_set_eq:Nc \l_@@_vars_prop + { \c_@@_vars_root_tl #1 / #2 } + } + { \prop_clear:N \l_@@_vars_prop } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Creating new template types} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_define_type:nn, \@@_declare_type:nn} +% Although the type is the \enquote{top level} of the template +% system, it is actually very easy to implement. All that happens is that +% the number of arguments required is recorded, indexed by the name of the +% type. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_define_type:nn #1#2 + { + \prop_if_in:NnTF \g_@@_type_prop {#1} + { \msg_error:nnn { template } { type-already-defined } {#1} } + { \@@_declare_type:nn {#1} {#2} } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_type:nn #1#2 + { + \int_set:Nn \l_@@_tmp_int {#2} + \int_compare:nTF { 0 <= \l_@@_tmp_int <= 9 } + { + \msg_info:nnnV { template } { declare-type } + {#1} \l_@@_tmp_int + \prop_gput:NnV \g_@@_type_prop {#1} + \l_@@_tmp_int + } + { + \msg_error:nnnV { template } { bad-number-of-arguments } + {#1} \l_@@_tmp_int + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Design part of template declaration} +% +% The \enquote{design} part of a template declaration defines the general +% behaviour of each key, and possibly a default value. However, it does +% not include the implementation. This means that what happens here is +% the two properties are saved to appropriate lists, which can then +% be used later to recover the information when implementing the keys. +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_declare_template_keys:nnnn} +% The main function for the \enquote{design} part of creating a template +% starts by checking that the type exists and that the number of +% arguments required agree. If that is all fine, then the two storage +% areas for defaults and keytypes are initialised. The mechanism is then +% set up for the \pkg{l3keys} module to actually parse the keys. +% Finally, the code hands of to the storage routine to save the parsed +% information properly. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_template_keys:nnnn #1#2#3#4 + { + \@@_execute_if_type_exist:nT {#1} + { + \@@_execute_if_arg_agree:nnT {#1} {#3} + { + \prop_clear:N \l_@@_values_prop + \prop_clear:N \l_@@_keytypes_prop + \seq_clear:N \l_@@_key_order_seq + \keyval_parse:NNn + \@@_parse_keys_elt:n \@@_parse_keys_elt:nn {#4} + \@@_store_defaults:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_store_keytypes:nn {#1} {#2} + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_keys_elt:n} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_keys_elt_aux:n} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_keys_elt_aux:} +% Processing the key part of the key--value pair is always carried out +% using this function, even if a value was found. First, the key name +% is separated from the keytype, and if necessary the keytype is +% separated into two parts. This information is then used to check that +% the keytype is valid, before storing the keytype (plus argument if +% necessary) as a property of the key name. The key name is also stored +% (in braces) in the token list to record the order the keys are defined +% in. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_keys_elt:n #1 + { + \@@_split_keytype:n {#1} + \bool_if:NF \l_@@_error_bool + { + \@@_execute_if_keytype_exist:VT \l_@@_keytype_tl + { + \seq_map_function:NN \c_@@_keytypes_arg_seq + \@@_parse_keys_elt_aux:n + \bool_if:NF \l_@@_error_bool + { + \seq_if_in:NoTF \l_@@_key_order_seq + \l_@@_key_name_tl + { + \msg_error:nnV { template } { duplicate-key-interface } + \l_@@_key_name_tl + } + { \@@_parse_keys_elt_aux: } + } + } + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_keys_elt_aux:n #1 + { + \str_if_eq:VnT \l_@@_keytype_tl {#1} + { + \tl_if_empty:NT \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl + { + \msg_error:nnn { template } { keytype-requires-argument } {#1} + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_error_bool + \seq_map_break: + } + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_keys_elt_aux: + { + \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_tmp_tl + { + \l_@@_keytype_tl + \tl_if_empty:NF \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl + { { \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl } } + } + \prop_put:NVV \l_@@_keytypes_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl + \l_@@_tmp_tl + \seq_put_right:NV \l_@@_key_order_seq \l_@@_key_name_tl + \str_if_eq:VnT \l_@@_keytype_tl { choice } + { + \clist_if_in:NnT \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl { unknown } + { \msg_error:nn { template } { choice-unknown-reserved } } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_keys_elt:nn} +% For keys which have a default, the keytype and key name are first +% separated out by the \cs{@@_parse_keys_elt:n} +% routine, before storing the default value in the scratch property list. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_keys_elt:nn #1#2 + { + \@@_parse_keys_elt:n {#1} + \use:c { @@_store_value_ \l_@@_keytype_tl :n } {#2} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_split_keytype:n} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_split_keytype_aux:w} +% The keytype and key name should be separated by |:|. As the +% definition might be given inside or outside of a code block, +% the category code of colons is standardised. After +% that, the standard delimited argument method is used to separate the +% two parts. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npe \@@_split_keytype:n #1 + { + \exp_not:N \bool_set_false:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_error_bool + \tl_set:Nn \exp_not:N \l_@@_tmp_tl {#1} + \tl_replace_all:Nnn \exp_not:N \l_@@_tmp_tl { : } { \token_to_str:N : } + \tl_if_in:VnTF \exp_not:N \l_@@_tmp_tl { \token_to_str:N : } + { + \exp_not:n + { + \tl_clear:N \l_@@_key_name_tl + \exp_after:wN \@@_split_keytype_aux:w + \l_@@_tmp_tl \s_@@_stop + } + } + { + \exp_not:N \bool_set_true:N \exp_not:N \l_@@_error_bool + \msg_error:nnn { template } { missing-keytype } {#1} + } + } +\use:e + { + \cs_new_protected:Npn \exp_not:N \@@_split_keytype_aux:w + #1 \token_to_str:N : #2 \s_@@_stop + { + \tl_put_right:Ne \exp_not:N \l_@@_key_name_tl + { + \exp_not:N \tl_trim_spaces:e + { \exp_not:N \tl_to_str:n {#1} } + } + \tl_if_in:nnTF {#2} { \token_to_str:N : } + { + \tl_put_right:Nn \exp_not:N \l_@@_key_name_tl + { \token_to_str:N : } + \exp_not:N \@@_split_keytype_aux:w #2 \s_@@_stop + } + { + \exp_not:N \tl_if_empty:NTF \exp_not:N \l_@@_key_name_tl + { + \msg_error:nnn { template } { empty-key-name } + { \token_to_str:N : #2 } + } + { \exp_not:N \@@_split_keytype_arg:n {#2} } + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_split_keytype_arg:n, \@@_split_keytype_arg:V} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_split_keytype_arg_aux:n} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_split_keytype_arg_aux:w} +% The second stage of sorting out the keytype is to check for an +% argument. As there is no convenient delimiting token to look for, +% a check is made instead for each possible text value for the keytype. +% To keep things faster, this only involves the keytypes that need an +% argument. If a match is made, then a check is also needed to see that +% it is at the start of the keytype information. All being well, the +% split can then be applied. Any non-matching keytypes are assumed to +% be \enquote{correct} as given, and are left alone (this is checked by +% other code). +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_split_keytype_arg:n #1 + { + \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_keytype_tl { \tl_trim_spaces:n {#1} } + \tl_clear:N \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl + \cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_split_keytype_arg_aux:n ##1 + { + \tl_if_in:nnT {#1} {##1} + { + \cs_set:Npn \@@_split_keytype_arg_aux:w + ####1 ##1 ####2 \s_@@_stop + { + \tl_if_blank:nT {####1} + { + \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_keytype_tl + { \tl_trim_spaces:n {##1} } + \tl_if_blank:nF {####2} + { + \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl + { \use:n ####2 } + } + \seq_map_break: + } + } + \@@_split_keytype_arg_aux:w #1 \s_@@_stop + } + } + \seq_map_function:NN \c_@@_keytypes_arg_seq + \@@_split_keytype_arg_aux:n + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_split_keytype_arg:n { V } +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_keytype_arg_aux:n #1 { } +\cs_new:Npn \@@_split_keytype_arg_aux:w #1 \s_@@_stop { } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Storing values} +% +% As \pkg{lttemplates} pre-processes key values for efficiency reasons, +% there is a need to convert the values given as defaults into +% \enquote{ready to use} data. The same general idea is true when an instance +% is declared. However, assignments are not made until an instance is +% used, and so there has to be some intermediate storage. Furthermore, +% the ability to delay evaluation of results is needed. To achieve these +% aims, a series of \enquote{process and store} functions are defined here. +% +% All of the information about the key (the key name and the keytype) +% is already stored as variables. The same property list is always used +% to store the data, meaning that the only argument required is the +% value to be processed and potentially stored. +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_store_value_boolean:n} +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_value_boolean:n #1 + { \prop_put:Non \l_@@_values_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl {#1} } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_store_value:n, \@@_store_value_choice:n, +% \@@_store_value_function:n, \@@_store_value_instance:n} +% With no need to worry about delayed evaluation, these keytypes all +% just store the input directly. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_value:n #1 + { \prop_put:Non \l_@@_values_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl {#1} } +\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_store_value_choice:n \@@_store_value:n +\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_store_value_function:n \@@_store_value:n +\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_store_value_instance:n \@@_store_value:n +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_store_value_aux:Nn, \@@_store_value_integer:n, +% \@@_store_value_length:n, \@@_store_value_muskip:n, +% \@@_store_value_real:n, \@@_store_value_skip:n, +% \@@_store_value_tokenlist:n, \@@_store_value_commalist:n} +% Storing values in \cs{l_@@_values_prop} is in most cases the same. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_value_aux:Nn #1#2 + { \prop_put:Non \l_@@_values_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl {#2} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_value_integer:n + { \@@_store_value_aux:Nn \int_eval:n } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_value_length:n + { \@@_store_value_aux:Nn \dim_eval:n } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_value_muskip:n + { \@@_store_value_aux:Nn \muskip_eval:n } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_value_real:n + { \@@_store_value_aux:Nn \fp_eval:n } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_value_skip:n + { \@@_store_value_aux:Nn \skip_eval:n } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_value_tokenlist:n + { \@@_store_value_aux:Nn \use:n } +\cs_new_eq:NN \@@_store_value_commalist:n \@@_store_value_tokenlist:n +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Implementation part of template declaration} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_declare_template_code:nnnnn} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_declare_template_code:nnnn} +% The main function for implementing a template starts with a couple of +% simple checks to make sure that there are no obvious mistakes: the +% number of arguments must agree and the template keys must have been +% declared. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_template_code:nnnnn #1#2#3#4#5 + { + \@@_execute_if_type_exist:nT {#1} + { + \@@_execute_if_arg_agree:nnT {#1} {#3} + { + \@@_if_keys_exist:nnT {#1} {#2} + { + \@@_store_key_implementation:nnn {#1} {#2} {#4} + \regex_match:nnTF { \c { AssignTemplateKeys } } {#5} + { \@@_declare_template_code:nnnn {#1} {#2} {#3} {#5} } + { + \@@_declare_template_code:nnnn + {#1} {#2} {#3} { \AssignTemplateKeys #5 } + } + } + } + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_template_code:nnnn #1#2#3#4 + { + \cs_if_exist:cT { \c_@@_code_root_tl #1 / #2 } + { \msg_info:nnnn { template } { declare-template-code } {#1} {#2} } + \cs_generate_from_arg_count:cNnn + { \c_@@_code_root_tl #1 / #2 } + \cs_gset_protected:Npn {#3} {#4} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_store_key_implementation:nnn} +% Actually storing the implementation part of a template is quite easy +% as it only requires the list of keys given to be turned into a +% property list. There is also some error-checking to do, hence the need +% to have the list of defined keytypes available. In certain cases +% (when choices are involved) parsing the key results in changes to the +% default values. That is why they are loaded and then saved again. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_store_key_implementation:nnn #1#2#3 + { + \@@_recover_defaults:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_recover_keytypes:nn {#1} {#2} + \prop_clear:N \l_@@_vars_prop + \keyval_parse:nnn + { \@@_parse_vars_elt:n } { \@@_parse_vars_elt:nnn { #1 / #2 } } {#3} + \@@_store_vars:nn {#1} {#2} + \prop_map_inline:Nn \l_@@_keytypes_prop + { \msg_error:nnnnn { template } { key-not-implemented } {##1} {#2} {#1} } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_vars_elt:n} +% At the implementation stage, every key must have a value given. So +% this is an error function. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_vars_elt:n #1 + { \msg_error:nnn { template } { key-no-variable } {#1} } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_vars_elt:nnn} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nn} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nw} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nnn, \@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nne} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_vars_elt_key:nn} +% The actual storage part here is very simple: the storage bin name +% is placed into the property list. At the same time, a comparison is +% made with the keytypes defined earlier: if there is a mismatch then +% an error is raised. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_vars_elt:nnn #1#2#3 + { + \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_key_name_tl + { \tl_trim_spaces:e { \tl_to_str:n {#2} } } + \prop_get:NVNTF \l_@@_keytypes_prop + \l_@@_key_name_tl + \l_@@_keytype_tl + { + \@@_split_keytype_arg:V \l_@@_keytype_tl + \@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nn {#1} {#3} + \prop_remove:NV \l_@@_keytypes_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl + } + { \msg_error:nnn { template } { unknown-key } {#2} } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% Split off any leading \texttt{global} and they look for the way to +% implement. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nn #1#2 + { + \@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nw {#1} #2 global global \s_@@_stop + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nw + #1#2 global #3 global #4 \s_@@_stop + { + \tl_if_blank:nTF {#4} + { \@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nnn {#1} { } {#2} } + { + \tl_if_blank:nTF {#2} + { + \@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nne + {#1} { global } { \tl_trim_spaces:n {#3} } + } + { \msg_error:nnn { template } { bad-variable } { #2 global #3 } } + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nnn #1#2#3 + { + \str_case:VnF \l_@@_keytype_tl + { + { choice } { \@@_implement_choices:nn {#1} {#3} } + { function } + { + \cs_if_exist:NF #3 + { \cs_new:Npn #3 { } } + \@@_parse_vars_elt_key:nn {#1} + { + .code:n = + { + \cs_generate_from_arg_count:NNnn + \exp_not:N #3 + \exp_not:c + { cs_ \str_if_eq:nnT {#1} { global } { g } set:Npn } + { \exp_not:V \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl } + {##1} + } + } + \prop_put:NVn \l_@@_vars_prop + \l_@@_key_name_tl {#2#3} + } + { instance } + { + \@@_parse_vars_elt_key:nn {#1} + { + .code:n = + { + \exp_not:c + { cs_ \str_if_eq:nnT {#1} { global } { g } set:Npn } + \exp_not:N #3 { \UseInstance {##1} } + } + } + \prop_put:NVn \l_@@_vars_prop + \l_@@_key_name_tl {#2#3} + } + } + { + \tl_if_single:nTF {#3} + { + \cs_if_exist:NF #3 + { \use:c { \@@_map_var_type: _new:N } #3 } + \@@_parse_vars_elt_key:nn {#1} + { + . \@@_map_var_type: + _ \str_if_eq:nnT {#1} { global } { g } set:N + = \exp_not:N #3 + } + \prop_put:NVn \l_@@_vars_prop + \l_@@_key_name_tl {#2#3} + } + { \msg_error:nnn { template } { bad-variable } {#2#3} } + } + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_parse_vars_elt_aux:nnn { nne } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_vars_elt_key:nn #1#2 + { + \keys_define:ne { template / #1 } + { \l_@@_key_name_tl #2 } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}[EXP]{\@@_map_var_type:} +% Turn a \enquote{friendly} variable type into an \texttt{expl3} one. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_map_var_type: + { + \str_case:Vn \l_@@_keytype_tl + { + { boolean } { bool } + { commalist } { clist } + { integer } { int } + { length } { dim } + { muskip } { muskip } + { real } { fp } + { skip } { skip } + { tokenlist } { tl } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_implement_choices:nn} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_implement_choices_default:} +% Implementing choices requires a second key--value loop. So after a +% little set-up, the standard parser is called. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_implement_choices:nn #1#2 + { + \clist_set:NV \l_@@_tmp_clist \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl + \prop_put:NVn \l_@@_vars_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl { } + \keys_define:ne { template / #1 } { \l_@@_key_name_tl .choice: } + \keyval_parse:nnn + { \@@_implement_choice_elt:n } + { \@@_implement_choice_elt:nnn {#1} } + {#2} + \prop_get:NVNT \l_@@_values_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl + \l_@@_tmp_tl + { \@@_implement_choices_default: } + \clist_if_empty:NF \l_@@_tmp_clist + { + \clist_map_inline:Nn \l_@@_tmp_clist + { \msg_error:nnn { template } { choice-not-implemented } {##1} } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% A sanity check for the default value, so that an error is raised +% now and not when converting to assignments. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_implement_choices_default: + { + \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_tmp_tl + { \l_@@_key_name_tl \c_space_tl \l_@@_tmp_tl } + \prop_if_in:NVF \l_@@_vars_prop \l_@@_tmp_tl + { + \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_tmp_tl + { \l_@@_key_name_tl \c_space_tl \l_@@_tmp_tl } + \prop_if_in:NVF \l_@@_vars_prop \l_@@_tmp_tl + { + \prop_get:NVN \l_@@_keytypes_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl + \l_@@_tmp_tl + \@@_split_keytype_arg:V \l_@@_tmp_tl + \prop_get:NVN \l_@@_values_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl + \l_@@_tmp_tl + \msg_error:nnVV { template } { unknown-default-choice } + \l_@@_key_name_tl + \l_@@_key_name_tl + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_implement_choice_elt:nnn, \@@_implement_choice_elt_aux:nnn} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_implement_choice_elt_aux:n} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_implement_choice_elt:n} +% The actual storage of the implementation of a choice is mainly about +% error checking. The code here ensures that all choices have to have +% been declared, apart from the special \texttt{unknown} choice, which +% must come last. The code for each choice is stored along with the +% key name in the variables property list. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_implement_choice_elt:nnn #1#2#3 + { + \clist_if_empty:NTF \l_@@_tmp_clist + { + \str_if_eq:nnTF {#2} { unknown } + { \@@_implement_choice_elt_aux:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} } + { \@@_implement_choice_elt_aux:n {#2} } + } + { + \clist_if_in:NnTF \l_@@_tmp_clist {#2} + { + \clist_remove_all:Nn \l_@@_tmp_clist {#2} + \@@_implement_choice_elt_aux:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} + } + { \@@_implement_choice_elt_aux:n {#2} } + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_implement_choice_elt_aux:n #1 + { + \prop_get:NVN \l_@@_keytypes_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl + \l_@@_tmp_tl + \@@_split_keytype_arg:V \l_@@_tmp_tl + \msg_error:nnVn { template } { unknown-choice } \l_@@_key_name_tl {#1} + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_implement_choice_elt_aux:nnn #1#2#3 + { + \keys_define:ne { template / #1 } + { \l_@@_key_name_tl / #2 .code:n = { \exp_not:n {#3} } } + \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_tmp_tl + { \l_@@_key_name_tl \c_space_tl #2 } + \prop_put:NVn \l_@@_vars_prop \l_@@_tmp_tl {#3} + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_implement_choice_elt:n #1 + { + \msg_error:nnVn { template } { choice-requires-code } + \l_@@_key_name_tl {#1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Editing template defaults} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_edit_defaults:nnn} +% Editing the template defaults means getting the values back out +% of the store, then parsing the list of new values before putting +% the updated list back into storage. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_edit_defaults:nnn #1#2#3 + { + \@@_if_keys_exist:nnT {#1} {#2} + { + \@@_recover_defaults:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_parse_values:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} + \@@_store_defaults:nn {#1} {#2} + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_values:nnn} +% The routine to parse values is the same for both editing a +% template and setting up an instance. So the code here does only the +% minimum necessary for reading the values. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_values:nnn #1#2#3 + { + \@@_recover_keytypes:nn {#1} {#2} + \keyval_parse:NNn + \@@_parse_values_elt:n \@@_parse_values_elt:nn {#3} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_values_elt:n} +% Every key needs a value, so this is just an error routine. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_values_elt:n #1 + { + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_error_bool + \msg_error:nnn { template } { key-no-value } {#1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_values_elt:nn} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_parse_values_elt_aux:n} +% To store the value, find the keytype then call the saving function. +% These need the current key name saved as \cs{l_@@_key_name_tl}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_values_elt:nn #1#2 + { + \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_key_name_tl + { \tl_trim_spaces:e { \tl_to_str:n {#1} } } + \prop_get:NVNTF \l_@@_keytypes_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl + \l_@@_tmp_tl + { \@@_parse_values_elt_aux:n {#2} } + { \msg_error:nnV { template } { unknown-key } \l_@@_key_name_tl } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_parse_values_elt_aux:n #1 + { + \@@_split_keytype_arg:V \l_@@_tmp_tl + \use:c { @@_store_value_ \l_@@_keytype_tl :n } {#1} + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_template_set_eq:nnn} +% To copy a template, each of the lists plus the code has to be copied +% across. To keep this independent of the list storage system, it is +% all done with two-part shuffles. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_template_set_eq:nnn #1#2#3 + { + \@@_recover_defaults:nn {#1} {#3} + \@@_store_defaults:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_recover_keytypes:nn {#1} {#3} + \@@_store_keytypes:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_recover_vars:nn {#1} {#3} + \@@_store_vars:nn {#1} {#2} + \cs_if_exist:cT { \c_@@_code_root_tl #1 / #2 } + { \msg_info:nnnn { template } { declare-template-code } {#1} {#2} } + \cs_gset_eq:cc { \c_@@_code_root_tl #1 / #2 } + { \c_@@_code_root_tl #1 / #3 } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Creating instances of templates} +% +% \begin{macro} +% { +% \@@_declare_instance:nnnn, +% \@@_declare_instance_aux:nnnn +% } +% Making an instance has two distinct parts. First, the keys given are +% parsed to transfer the values into the structured data format used +% internally. This allows the default and given values to be combined +% with no repetition. In the second step, the structured data is +% converted to pre-defined variable assignments, and these are stored +% in the function for the instance. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_instance:nnnn #1#2#3#4 + { + \@@_execute_if_code_exist:nnT {#1} {#2} + { + \@@_recover_defaults:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_recover_vars:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_declare_instance_aux:nnnn {#1} {#2} {#3} {#4} + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_declare_instance_aux:nnnn #1#2#3#4 + { + \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_error_bool + \@@_parse_values:nnn {#1} {#2} {#4} + \bool_if:NF \l_@@_error_bool + { + \prop_put:Nnn \l_@@_values_prop { from~template } {#2} + \@@_store_values:nn {#1} {#3} + \@@_convert_to_assignments: + \cs_if_exist:cT { \c_@@_instances_root_tl #1 / #3 } + { \msg_info:nnnn { template } { declare-instance } {#3} {#1} } + \cs_set_protected:cpe { \c_@@_instances_root_tl #1 / #3 } + { + \exp_not:N \@@_assignments_push:n + { \exp_not:V \l_@@_assignments_tl } + \exp_not:c { \c_@@_code_root_tl #1 / #2 } + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_instance_set_eq:nnn} +% Copy--paste an instance. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_instance_set_eq:nnn #1#2#3 + { + \@@_if_instance_exist:nnTF {#1} {#3} + { + \@@_recover_values:nn {#1} {#3} + \@@_store_values:nn {#1} {#2} + \cs_if_exist:cT { \c_@@_instances_root_tl #1 / #2 } + { \msg_info:nnnn { template } { declare-instance } {#2} {#1} } + \cs_set_eq:cc { \c_@@_instances_root_tl #1 / #2 } + { \c_@@_instances_root_tl #1 / #3 } + } + { \msg_error:nnnn { template } { unknown-instance } {#1} {#3} } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_edit_instance:nnn} +% \begin{macro} +% {\@@_edit_instance_aux:nnnnn, \@@_edit_instance_aux:nVnnn} +% Editing an instance is almost identical to declaring one. The only +% variation is the source of the values to use. When editing, they are +% recovered from the previous instance run. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_edit_instance:nnn #1#2#3 + { + \@@_if_instance_exist:nnTF {#1} {#2} + { + \@@_recover_values:nn {#1} {#2} + \prop_get:NnN \l_@@_values_prop { from~template } + \l_@@_tmp_tl + \@@_edit_instance_aux:nVnn + {#1} \l_@@_tmp_tl {#2} {#3} + } + { \msg_error:nnnn { template } { unknown-instance } {#1} {#2} } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_edit_instance_aux:nnnn #1#2#3#4 + { + \@@_recover_vars:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_declare_instance_aux:nnnn {#1} {#2} {#3} {#4} + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_edit_instance_aux:nnnn { nV } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_convert_to_assignments:} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_convert_to_assignments_aux:n} +% \begin{macro} +% {\@@_convert_to_assignments_aux:nn, \@@_convert_to_assignments_aux:nV} +% The idea on converting to a set of assignments is to loop over each +% key, so that the loop order follows the declaration order of the keys. +% This is done using a sequence as property lists are not +% \enquote{ordered}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_convert_to_assignments: + { + \tl_clear:N \l_@@_assignments_tl + \seq_map_function:NN \l_@@_key_order_seq + \@@_convert_to_assignments_aux:n + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_convert_to_assignments_aux:n #1 + { + \prop_get:NnN \l_@@_keytypes_prop {#1} \l_@@_tmp_tl + \@@_convert_to_assignments_aux:nV {#1} \l_@@_tmp_tl + } +% \end{macrocode} +% The second auxiliary function actually does the work. The +% arguments here are the key name (|#1|) and the keytype (|#2|). +% From those, the value to assign and the name of the appropriate +% variable are recovered. A bit of work is then needed to sort out +% keytypes with arguments (for example instances), and to look for +% global assignments. Once that is done, a hand-off can be made to the +% handler for the relevant keytype. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_convert_to_assignments_aux:nn #1#2 + { + \prop_get:NnNT \l_@@_values_prop {#1} \l_@@_value_tl + { + \prop_get:NnNTF \l_@@_vars_prop {#1} \l_@@_var_tl + { + \@@_split_keytype_arg:n {#2} + \str_if_eq:VnF \l_@@_keytype_tl { choice } + { + \str_if_eq:VnF \l_@@_keytype_tl { code } + { \@@_find_global: } + } + \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_key_name_tl {#1} + \cs_if_exist_use:cF { @@_assign_ \l_@@_keytype_tl : } + { \@@_assign_variable: } + } + { \msg_error:nnn { template } { unknown-attribute } {#1} } + } + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_convert_to_assignments_aux:nn { nV } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_find_global:} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_find_global_aux:w} +% Global assignments should have the phrase |global| at the front. +% This is pretty easy to find: no other error checking, though. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_find_global: + { + \bool_set_false:N \l_@@_global_bool + \tl_if_in:onT \l_@@_var_tl { global } + { + \exp_after:wN \@@_find_global_aux:w \l_@@_var_tl \s_@@_stop + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_find_global_aux:w #1 global #2 \s_@@_stop + { + \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_var_tl {#2} + \bool_set_true:N \l_@@_global_bool + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Using templates directly} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_use_template:nnn} +% Directly use a template with a particular parameter setting. +% This is also picked up if used in a nested fashion inside a parameter +% list. The idea is essentially the same as creating an instance, +% just with no saving of the result. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_use_template:nnn #1#2#3 + { + \@@_execute_if_code_exist:nnT {#1} {#2} + { + \@@_recover_defaults:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_recover_vars:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_parse_values:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} + \@@_convert_to_assignments: + \use:c { \c_@@_code_root_tl #1 / #2 } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Assigning values to variables} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_assign_boolean:} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_assign_boolean_aux:n} +% Setting a Boolean value is slightly different to everything else +% as the value can be used to work out which \texttt{set} function to +% call. As long as there is no need to recover things from another +% variable, everything is pretty easy. If there is, then we need to allow +% for the fact that the recovered value here will \emph{not} be expandable, +% so needs to be converted to something that is. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_assign_boolean: + { + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_global_bool + { \@@_assign_boolean_aux:n { bool_gset } } + { \@@_assign_boolean_aux:n { bool_set } } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_assign_boolean_aux:n #1 + { + \@@_if_key_value:VTF \l_@@_value_tl + { + \@@_key_to_value: + \tl_put_right:Ne \l_@@_assignments_tl + { + \exp_not:c { #1 _eq:NN } + \exp_not:V \l_@@_var_tl + \exp_not:V \l_@@_value_tl + } + } + { + \tl_put_right:Ne \l_@@_assignments_tl + { + \exp_not:c { #1 _ \l_@@_value_tl :N } + \exp_not:V \l_@@_var_tl + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_assign_choice:} +% \begin{macro} +% {\@@_assign_choice_aux:nF, \@@_assign_choice_aux:eF} +% The idea here is to find either the choice as-given or else the +% special |unknown| choice, and to copy the appropriate code across. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_assign_choice: + { + \@@_assign_choice_aux:eF + { \l_@@_key_name_tl \c_space_tl \l_@@_value_tl } + { + \@@_assign_choice_aux:eF + { \l_@@_key_name_tl \c_space_tl unknown } + { + \prop_get:NVN \l_@@_keytypes_prop \l_@@_key_name_tl + \l_@@_tmp_tl + \@@_split_keytype_arg:V \l_@@_tmp_tl + \msg_error:nnVV { template } { unknown-choice } + \l_@@_key_name_tl + \l_@@_value_tl + } + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_assign_choice_aux:nF #1 + { + \prop_get:NnNTF \l_@@_vars_prop {#1} \l_@@_tmp_tl + { \tl_put_right:NV \l_@@_assignments_tl \l_@@_tmp_tl } + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_assign_choice_aux:nF { e } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_assign_function:} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_assign_function_aux:N} +% This looks a bit messy but is only actually one function. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_assign_function: + { + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_global_bool + { \@@_assign_function_aux:N \cs_gset:Npn } + { \@@_assign_function_aux:N \cs_set:Npn } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_assign_function_aux:N #1 + { + \tl_put_right:Ne \l_@@_assignments_tl + { + \cs_generate_from_arg_count:NNnn + \exp_not:V \l_@@_var_tl + \exp_not:N #1 + { \exp_not:V \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl } + { \exp_not:V \l_@@_value_tl } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_assign_instance:} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_assign_instance_aux:N} +% Using an instance means adding the appropriate function creation to +% the tl. No checks are made at this stage, so if the instance is +% not valid then errors will arise later. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_assign_instance: + { + \bool_if:NTF \l_@@_global_bool + { \@@_assign_instance_aux:N \cs_gset_protected:Npn } + { \@@_assign_instance_aux:N \cs_set_protected:Npn } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_assign_instance_aux:N #1 + { + \tl_put_right:Ne \l_@@_assignments_tl + { + \exp_not:N #1 \exp_not:V \l_@@_var_tl + { + \@@_use_instance:nn + { \exp_not:V \l_@@_keytype_arg_tl } + { \exp_not:V \l_@@_value_tl } + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_assign_variable:} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_assign_variable:N, \@@_assign_variable:c} +% A general-purpose function for all of the other assignments. +% As long as the value is not coming from another variable, the stored +% value is simply transferred for output. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_assign_variable: + { + \@@_assign_variable:c + { + \@@_map_var_type: _ + \bool_if:NT \l_@@_global_bool { g } set:Nn + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_assign_variable:N #1 + { + \@@_if_key_value:VT \l_@@_value_tl + { \@@_key_to_value: } + \tl_put_right:Ne \l_@@_assignments_tl + { + #1 \exp_not:V \l_@@_var_tl + { \exp_not:V \l_@@_value_tl } + } + } +\cs_generate_variant:Nn \@@_assign_variable:N { c } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_key_to_value:} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_key_to_value_auxi:w} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_key_to_value_auxii:w} +% The idea here is to recover the attribute value of another key. To +% do that, the marker is removed and a look up takes place. If this +% is successful, then the name of the variable of the attribute is +% returned. This assumes that the value will be used in context where +% it will be converted to a value, for example when setting a number. +% There is also a need to check in case the copied value happens to be +% \texttt{global}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_key_to_value: + { \exp_after:wN \@@_key_to_value_auxi:w \l_@@_value_tl } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_key_to_value_auxi:w \KeyValue #1 + { + \tl_set:Ne \l_@@_tmp_tl { \tl_trim_spaces:e { \tl_to_str:n {#1} } } + \prop_get:NVNTF \l_@@_vars_prop \l_@@_tmp_tl + \l_@@_value_tl + { + \exp_after:wN \@@_key_to_value_auxii:w \l_@@_value_tl + \s_@@_mark global \q_@@_nil \s_@@_stop + } + { \msg_error:nnV { template } { unknown-attribute } \l_@@_tmp_tl } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_key_to_value_auxii:w #1 global #2#3 \s_@@_stop + { + \@@_quark_if_nil:NF #2 + { \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_value_tl {#2} } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Using instances} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_use_instance:nn} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_use_instance_aux:nNnnn} +% \begin{macro}{\@@_use_instance_aux:nn} +% Using an instance is just a question of finding the appropriate function. +% If nothing is found, an error is raised. One complication is that +% if the first token of argument |#2| is \cs{UseTemplate} then that +% is also valid. There is an error-test to make sure that the +% types agree, and if so the template is used directly. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_use_instance:nn #1#2 + { + \@@_if_use_template:nTF {#2} + { \@@_use_instance_aux:nNnnn {#1} #2 } + { \@@_use_instance_aux:nn {#1} {#2} } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_use_instance_aux:nNnnn #1#2#3#4#5 + { + \str_if_eq:nnTF {#1} {#3} + { \@@_use_template:nnn {#3} {#4} {#5} } + { \msg_error:nnnn { template } { type-mismatch } {#1} {#3} } +} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_use_instance_aux:nn #1#2 + { + \@@_if_instance_exist:nnTF {#1} {#2} + { \use:c { \c_@@_instances_root_tl #1 / #2 } } + { \msg_error:nnnn { template } { unknown-instance } {#1} {#2} } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +%\subsection{Assignment manipulation} +% +% A few functions to transfer assignments about, as this is needed by +% \cs{AssignTemplateKeys}. +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_assignments_pop:} +% To actually use the assignments. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \@@_assignments_pop: { \l_@@_assignments_tl } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_assignments_push:n} +% Here, the assignments are stored for later use. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_assignments_push:n #1 + { \tl_set:Nn \l_@@_assignments_tl {#1} } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Showing templates and instances} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_show_code:nn} +% Showing the code for a template is just a translation of +% \cs{cs_show:c}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_show_code:nn #1#2 + { \cs_show:c { \c_@@_code_root_tl #1 / #2 } } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro} +% { +% \@@_show_defaults:nn, +% \@@_show_keytypes:nn, +% \@@_show_vars:nn +% } +% \begin{macro}{\@@_show:Nnnn} +% A modified version of the property-list printing code, such that +% the output refers to templates and instances rather than to the +% underlying structures. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_show_defaults:nn #1#2 + { + \@@_if_keys_exist:nnT {#1} {#2} + { + \@@_recover_defaults:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_show:Nnnn \l_@@_values_prop + {#1} {#2} { default~values } + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_show_keytypes:nn #1#2 + { + \@@_if_keys_exist:nnT {#1} {#2} + { + \@@_recover_keytypes:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_show:Nnnn \l_@@_keytypes_prop + {#1} {#2} { interface } + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_show_vars:nn #1#2 + { + \@@_execute_if_code_exist:nnT {#1} {#2} + { + \@@_recover_vars:nn {#1} {#2} + \@@_show:Nnnn \l_@@_vars_prop + {#1} {#2} { variable~mapping } + } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_show:Nnnn #1#2#3#4 + { + \msg_show:nneeee { template } { show-attribute } + { \tl_to_str:n {#2} } + { \tl_to_str:n {#3} } + { \tl_to_str:n {#4} } + { \prop_map_function:NN #1 \msg_show_item_unbraced:nn } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@_show_values:nn} +% Instance values are a little more complex, as is the template to consider. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_show_values:nn #1#2 + { + \@@_if_instance_exist:nnT {#1} {#2} + { + \@@_recover_values:nn {#1} {#2} + \msg_show:nneee { template } { show-values } + { \tl_to_str:n {#1} } + { \tl_to_str:n {#2} } + { + \prop_map_function:NN \l_@@_values_prop + \msg_show_item_unbraced:nn + } + } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Messages} +% +% The text for error messages: short and long text for all of them. +% \begin{macrocode} +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { argument-number-mismatch } + { Template~type~'#1'~takes~#2~argument(s). } + { + Templates~of~type~'#1'~require~#2~argument(s).\\ + You~have~tried~to~make~a~template~for~'#1'~ + with~#3~argument(s),~which~is~not~possible:~ + the~number~of~arguments~must~agree. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { bad-number-of-arguments } + { Bad~number~of~arguments~for~template~type~'#1'. } + { + A~template~may~accept~between~0~and~9~arguments.\\ + You~asked~to~use~#2~arguments:~this~is~not~supported. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { bad-variable } + { Incorrect~variable~description~'#1'. } + { + The~argument~'#1'~is~not~of~the~form \\ + ~~'<variable>'\\ + ~or~\\ + ~~'global~<variable>'.\\ + It~must~be~given~in~one~of~these~formats~to~be~used~in~a~template. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { choice-not-implemented } + { The~choice~'#1'~has~no~implementation. } + { + Each~choice~listed~in~the~interface~for~a~template~must~ + have~an~implementation. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { choice-no-code } + { The~choice~'#1'~requires~implementation~details. } + { + When~creating~template~code~using~\DeclareTemplateCode,~ + each~choice~name~must~have~an~associated~implementation.\\ + This~should~be~given~after~a~'='~sign:~LaTeX~did~not~find~one. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { choice-requires-code } + { The~choice~'#2'~for~key~'#1'~requires~an~implementation. } + { + You~should~have~put:\\ + \ \ #1~:~choice~{~#2 = <code> ~} \\ + but~LaTeX~did~not~find~any~<code>. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { duplicate-key-interface } + { Key~'#1'~appears~twice~in~interface~definition~\msg_line_context:. } + { + Each~key~can~only~have~one~interface~declared~in~a~template.\\ + LaTeX~found~two~interfaces~for~'#1'. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { keytype-requires-argument } + { The~key~type~'#1'~requires~an~argument~\msg_line_context:. } + { + You~should~have~put:\\ + \ \ <key-name>~:~#1~{~<argument>~} \\ + but~LaTeX~did~not~find~an~<argument>. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { invalid-keytype } + { The~key~'#1'~is~missing~a~key-type~\msg_line_context:. } + { + Each~key~in~a~template~requires~a~key-type,~given~in~the~form:\\ + \ \ <key>~:~<key-type>\\ + LaTeX~could~not~find~a~<key-type>~in~your~input. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { key-no-value } + { The~key~'#1'~has~no~value~\msg_line_context:. } + { + When~creating~an~instance~of~a~template~ + every~key~listed~must~include~a~value:\\ + \ \ <key>~=~<value> + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { key-no-variable } + { The~key~'#1'~requires~implementation~details~\msg_line_context:. } + { + When~creating~template~code~using~\DeclareTemplateCode,~ + each~key~name~must~have~an~associated~implementation.\\ + This~should~be~given~after~a~'='~sign:~LaTeX~did~not~find~one. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { key-not-implemented } + { Key~'#1'~has~no~implementation~\msg_line_context:. } + { + The~definition~of~key~implementations~for~template~'#2'~ + of~template~type~'#3'~does~not~include~any~details~for~key~'#1'.\\ + The~key~was~declared~in~the~interface~definition,~ + and~so~an~implementation~is~required. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { missing-keytype } + { The~key~'#1'~is~missing~a~key-type~\msg_line_context:. } + { + Key~interface~definitions~should~be~of~the~form\\ + \ \ #1~:~<key-type>\\ + but~LaTeX~could~not~find~a~<key-type>. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { no-template-code } + { + The~template~'#2'~of~type~'#1'~is~unknown~ + or~has~no~implementation. + } + { + There~is~no~code~available~for~the~template~name~given.\\ + This~should~be~given~using~\DeclareTemplateCode. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { type-already-defined } + { Template~type~'#1'~already~defined. } + { + You~have~used~\NewTemplateType~ + with~a~template~type~that~has~already~been~defined. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { type-mismatch } + { Template~types~'#1'~and~'#2'~do~not~agree. } + { + You~are~trying~to~use~a~template~directly~with~\UseInstance + (or~a~similar~function),~but~the~template~types~do~not~match. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { unknown-attribute } + { The~template~attribute~'#1'~is~unknown. } + { + There~is~a~definition~in~the~current~template~reading\\ + \ \ \token_to_str:N \KeyValue {~#1~} \\ + but~there~is~no~key~called~'#1'. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { unknown-choice } + { The~choice~'#2'~was~not~declared~for~key~'#1'. } + { + The~key~'#1'~takes~a~fixed~list~of~choices~ + and~this~list~does~not~include~'#2'. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { unknown-default-choice } + { The~default~choice~'#2'~was~not~declared~for~key~'#1'. } + { + The~key~'#1'~takes~a~fixed~list~of~choices~ + and~this~list~does~not~include~'#2'. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { unknown-instance } + { The~instance~'#2'~of~type~'#1'~is~unknown. } + { + You~have~asked~to~use~an~instance~'#2',~ + but~this~has~not~been~created. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { unknown-key } + { Unknown~template~key~'#1'. } + { + The~key~'#1'~was~not~declared~in~the~interface~ + for~the~current~template. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { unknown-keytype } + { The~key-type~'#1'~is~unknown. } + { + Valid~key-types~are:\\ + -~boolean;\\ + -~choice;\\ + -~commalist;\\ + -~function;\\ + -~instance;\\ + -~integer;\\ + -~length;\\ + -~muskip;\\ + -~real;\\ + -~skip;\\ + -~tokenlist. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { unknown-type } + { The~template~type~'#1'~is~unknown. } + { + A~template~type~needs~to~be~defined~with~\NewTemplateType + prior~to~using~it. + } +\msg_new:nnnn { template } { unknown-template } + { The~template~'#2'~of~type~'#1'~is~unknown. } + { + No~interface~has~been~declared~for~a~template~ + '#2'~of~template~type~'#1'. + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Information messages only have text: more text should not be needed. +% \begin{macrocode} +\msg_new:nnn { template } { declare-instance } + { Declaring~instance~~'#1'~of~type~#2~\msg_line_context:. } +\msg_new:nnn { template } { declare-template-code } + { Declaring~code~for~template~'#2'~of~template~type~'#1'~\msg_line_context:. } +\msg_new:nnn { template } { declare-template-interface } + { + Declaring~interface~for~template~'#2'~of~template~type~'#1'~ + \msg_line_context:. + } +\msg_new:nnn { template } { declare-type } + { Declaring~template~type~'#1'~taking~#2~argument(s)~\msg_line_context:. } +\msg_new:nnn { template } { show-attribute } + { + The~template~'#2'~of~type~'#1'~has~ + \tl_if_empty:nTF {#4} { no~#3. } { #3 : #4 } + } +\msg_new:nnn { template } { show-values } + { + The~instance~'#2'~of~type~'#1'~has~ + \tl_if_empty:nTF {#3} { no~values. } { values: #3 } + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Also add \pkg{template} to the \pkg{LaTeX} messages. +% \begin{macrocode} +\prop_gput:Nnn \g_msg_module_type_prop { template } { LaTeX } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{User functions} +% +% \begin{macro}{\NewTemplateType} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTemplateInterface} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTemplateCode} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTemplateCopy} +% \begin{macro}{\EditTemplateDefaults} +% \begin{macro}{\UseTemplate} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareInstance} +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareInstanceCopy} +% \begin{macro}{\EditInstance} +% \begin{macro}{\UseInstance} +% All simple translations. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \NewTemplateType #1#2 + { \@@_define_type:nn {#1} {#2} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \DeclareTemplateInterface #1#2#3#4 + { \@@_declare_template_keys:nnnn {#1} {#2} {#3} {#4} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \DeclareTemplateCode #1#2#3#4#5 + { \@@_declare_template_code:nnnnn {#1} {#2} {#3} {#4} {#5} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \DeclareTemplateCopy #1#2#3 + { \@@_template_set_eq:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \EditTemplateDefaults #1#2#3 + { \@@_edit_defaults:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \UseTemplate #1#2#3 + { \@@_use_template:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \DeclareInstance #1#2#3#4 + { \@@_declare_instance:nnnn {#1} {#3} {#2} {#4} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \DeclareInstanceCopy #1#2#3 + { \@@_instance_set_eq:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \EditInstance #1#2#3 + { \@@_edit_instance:nnn {#1} {#2} {#3} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \UseInstance #1#2 + { \@@_use_instance:nn {#1} {#2} } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ShowTemplateCode} +% \begin{macro}{\ShowTemplateDefaults} +% \begin{macro}{\ShowTemplateInterface} +% \begin{macro}{\ShowTemplateVariables} +% \begin{macro}{\ShowInstanceValues} +% The show functions are again just translation. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \ShowTemplateCode #1#2 + { \@@_show_code:nn {#1} {#2} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \ShowTemplateDefaults #1#2 + { \@@_show_defaults:nn {#1} {#2} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \ShowTemplateInterface #1#2 + { \@@_show_keytypes:nn {#1} {#2} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \ShowTemplateVariables #1#2 + { \@@_show_vars:nn {#1} {#2} } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \ShowInstanceValues #1#2 + { \@@_show_values:nn {#1} {#2} } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\IfInstanceExistsT, \IfInstanceExistsF, \IfInstanceExistsTF} +% \changes{2024-02-15}{v1.0b}{New macros} +% \changes{2024-04-17}{v1.0c}{Use plural names} +% More direct translation. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new:Npn \IfInstanceExistsTF #1#2 + { \@@_if_instance_exist:nnTF {#1} {#2} } +\cs_new:Npn \IfInstanceExistsT #1#2 + { \@@_if_instance_exist:nnT {#1} {#2} } +\cs_new:Npn \IfInstanceExistsF #1#2 + { \@@_if_instance_exist:nnF {#1} {#2} } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\KeyValue} +% Simply dump the argument when executed: this should not happen. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \KeyValue #1 {#1} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\AssignTemplateKeys} +% A short call to use a token register by proxy. +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \AssignTemplateKeys { \@@_assignments_pop: } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\SetTemplateKeys} +% A friendly wrapper +% \begin{macrocode} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \SetTemplateKeys #1#2#3 + { \keys_set_known:nnN { template / #1 / #2 } {#3} \l_@@_tmp_clist } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}{lttemplates}% +%<latexrelease> {Prototype~document~commands}% +%<latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\EndModuleRelease +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOff +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%</2ekernel|latexrelease> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We need to stop DocStrip treating |@@| in a special way at this point. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<@@=> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \Finale
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttextcomp.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttextcomp.dtx index 5de3797f79b..7f247747d6a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttextcomp.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttextcomp.dtx @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ % % \ProvidesFile{lttextcomp.dtx} - [2022/08/07 v1.0g LaTeX Kernel (text companion symbols)] + [2024/04/24 v1.1c LaTeX Kernel (text companion symbols)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \begin{document} @@ -163,11 +163,12 @@ % % \begin{macro}{\DeclareEncodingSubset} % -% The declaration takes 3 mandatory arguments: an \emph{encoding} +% The declaration takes 3 mandatory arguments: an \emph{encoding} % for which a subsetting is wanted (currently always \texttt{TS1}, % and most likely forever), the \emph{font family} for which we -% declare the subset and finally the \emph{subset} number (between \texttt{0} (all -% of the encoding is supported) and \texttt{9} many glyphs are missing. +% declare the subset and finally the \emph{subset} number, with a value between +% \texttt{0} (all of the encoding is supported) and \texttt{9} (many +% glyphs are missing). % % For \texttt{TS1} the numbers have been chosen in a way that most % fonts can be fairly correctly categorized, but the default @@ -439,7 +440,7 @@ % \end{macrocode} % % And here are the other \texttt{TS1} glyphs that are implemented -% by every font (or nearly every---a few are commented out and +% by every font (or nearly every)---a few are commented out and % moved to sub-encoding 9, % because they aren't around in some fonts. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -950,6 +951,8 @@ % This first block contains the fonts that have been already % supported by the \texttt{textcomp} package way back, i.e., the % font families that have \TeX{} support since the mid-nineties. +% \changes{v1.1a}{2024/01/27}{Adjusted/corrected TS1 sub-encoding +% declarations for various families (gh/1257)} % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ccr} {0} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{cmbr} {0} @@ -981,16 +984,28 @@ \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lmss} {1} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lmssq} {1} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lmvtt} {1} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lmtt} {1} % missing TM, SM and - % pertenthousand for some reason +% \end{macrocode} +% The lmtt family is missing TM, SM, and perthousand for some +% reason, so the first safe sub-encoding would be 2, but that is +% then missing out a huge number of glyphs that are available, so +% we claim it is sub-encoding 1 even if this can lead to missing glyphs. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lmtt} {1} % missing TM, SM and pertenthousand % \end{macrocode} % +% The next three families have been removed from TeX Live, but we +% keep the definitions % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ptmx} {2} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ptmj} {2} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ul8} {2} % \end{macrocode} % +% The next set are the early PostScript font implementations, these +% days there are better alternatives, but \ldots. Note that, their +% virtual fonts contain a lot of ``tofu'' in form of black squares, +% thus they don't even give a missing character warning if you +% select such a glyph. This is why they are set as sub-encoding 5. % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{bch} {5} % tofu for blank, ohm \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{futj}{5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm @@ -1009,12 +1024,11 @@ \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ul9} {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm % \end{macrocode} % +% The next set suffers from the same problem and they contain even +% fewer real glyphs. % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{dayroms}{6} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{dayrom} {6} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{augie}{8} % really only missing euro \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{put} {8} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{uag} {8} % probably (currently broken distrib) @@ -1024,6 +1038,7 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{zi4} {9} % \end{macrocode} +% % LucidaBright (sold through TUG) probably not quite correct, I % guess as I have the older fonts \ldots % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1041,44 +1056,72 @@ % Below are the newer fonts that have support files for % \LaTeX{}. With very few exceptions the classifications are done % so that all characters are correctly produced (either being -% available in the font or substituted. +% available in the font or substituted). % % There are a few fonts that contain ``tofu'' squares in places % (instead of a real glyph) and in a few cases some really seldom % needed chars are unavailable, i.e., produce missing glyphs (to % avoid that a large number of available chars are unnecessarily -% substituted. +% substituted). % +% Encoding declarations for these font families shouldn't really be +% in the kernel, but part of the \texttt{.fd} files for the +% family. When we introduced the concept in 2021 we had some hope +% that this would happen over time and that we could take the +% declarations out---after all it is nearly impossible to maintain +% it correctly in the kernel, given that fonts may get new glyphs +% added (happened for several of them in the recent year) which is +% something we wouldn't notice. However, so far this hasn't +% happened, so in 2024, I went through the current set and adjusted +% the declarations in several places. +% +% Next four are wrong and still need adjustment: % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{lato-*} {0} % with a bunch of tofu inside \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{opensans-*} {0} % with a bunch of tofu inside \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{cantarell-*} {0} % with a bunch of tofu inside -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{fbb-*} {0} % missing centoldstyle +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{tli} {1} % with lots of tofu inside % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{tli} {1} % with lots of tofu inside +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{fbb-*} {2} % missing centoldstyle % \end{macrocode} % +% % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Alegreya-*} {2} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{AlegreyaSans-*} {2} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{BaskervilleF-*} {2} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{DejaVuSans-TLF} {2} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{DejaVuSansCondensed-TLF} {2} +% \end{macrocode} +% Next one is missing \cs{textfractionsolidus} but is otherwise +% completely sub-encoding 2 so we use that sub-encoding. +% \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{DejaVuSansMono-TLF} {2} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{EBGaramond-*} {2} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Merriwthr-OsF} {2} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{MerriwthrSans-OsF} {2} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Montserrat-*} {2} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{MontserratAlternates-*} {2} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{NotoSansMono-TLF} {2} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{NotoSansMono-TOsF} {2} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Tempora-TLF} {2} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Tempora-TOsF} {2} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{XCharter-TLF} {2} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{XCharter-TOsF} {2} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{erewhon-*} {2} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Arimo-TLF} {3} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Carlito-*} {3} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{FiraSans-*} {3} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Crlt-*} {3} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{IBMPlexMono-TLF} {3} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{IBMPlexSans-TLF} {3} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Merriweather-OsF} {3} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Montserrat-*} {3} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{MontserratAlternates-*} {3} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{IBMPlexSerif-TLF} {3} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{SourceCodePro-TLF} {3} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{SourceCodePro-TOsF} {3} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{SourceSansPro-*} {3} @@ -1096,6 +1139,7 @@ \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{CrimsonPro-*} {4} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{FiraMono-TLF} {4} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{FiraMono-TOsF} {4} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{FiraSans-*} {4} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Go-TLF} {4} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{GoMono-TLF} {4} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{InriaSans-*} {4} @@ -1108,7 +1152,6 @@ \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LinguisticsPro-OsF} {4} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LinuxBiolinumT-*} {4} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LinuxLibertineT-*} {4} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{MerriweatherSans-OsF} {4} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{MintSpirit-*} {4} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{MintSpiritNoTwo-*} {4} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{PTMono-TLF} {4} @@ -1128,66 +1171,64 @@ % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Almendra-OsF} {5} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Almndr-OsF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Baskervaldx-*} {5} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{BaskervilleF-*} {5} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Bitter-TLF} {5} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Bttr-TLF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Cinzel-LF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{CinzelDecorative-LF} {5} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Cochineal-*} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{DejaVuSerif-TLF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{DejaVuSerifCondensed-TLF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{GilliusADF-LF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{GilliusADFCond-LF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{GilliusADFNoTwo-LF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{GilliusADFNoTwoCond-LF} {5} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LobsterTwo-LF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{OldStandard-TLF} {5} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{PlayfairDisplay-TLF} {5} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{PlayfairDisplay-TOsF} {5} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{PlyfrDisplay-TLF} {5} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{PlyfrDisplay-TOsF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{TheanoDidot-TLF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{TheanoDidot-TOsF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{TheanoModern-TLF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{TheanoModern-TOsF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{TheanoOldStyle-TLF} {5} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{TheanoOldStyle-TOsF} {5} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{charssil-TLF} {5} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Crimson-TLF} {6} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{IBMPlexMono-TLF} {6} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{IBMPlexSerif-TLF} {6} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LibertinusMono-TLF} {6} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LibertinusSerifDisplay-LF}{6} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LinuxLibertineDisplayT-*} {6} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LinuxLibertineMonoT-LF} {6} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LinuxLibertineMonoT-TLF} {6} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Overlock-LF} {6} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Ovrlck-LF} {6} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ComicNeue-TLF} {7} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ComicNeueAngular-TLF} {7} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{CormorantGaramond-*} {7} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Heuristica-TLF} {7} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Heuristica-TOsF} {7} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{IMFELLEnglish-TLF} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LibreBaskerville-TLF} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LibreCaslon-*} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Marcellus-LF} {7} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LibreBskrvl-TLF} {7} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LibreCsln-*} {7} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Lbstr-LF} {7} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Mrcls-LF} {7} +% \end{macrocode} +% Strangely enough NotoSerif and NotoSans are sub-encoding 7 as +% they are missing \cs{textminus} and several other glyphs. In +% contrast the NotoSansMono is far more complete. +% \begin{macrocode} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{NotoSans-*} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{NotoSansMono-TLF} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{NotoSansMono-TOsF} {7} \DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{NotoSerif-*} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Quattrocento-TLF} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{QuattrocentoSans-TLF} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{XCharter-TLF} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{XCharter-TOsF} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{erewhon-*} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ComicNeue-TLF} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ComicNeueAngular-TLF} {7} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Forum-LF} {7} % the superiors are missing +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Quattro-LF} {7} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{QuattroSans-LF} {7} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Frm-LF} {7} % the superiors are missing % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{Cochineal-*} {8} +\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{LibertinusMono-TLF} {8} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1231,7 +1272,7 @@ % % Here are new names for the legacy symbols that \LaTeX{} used to % pick up from the \texttt{OMS} encoded fonts (and used for itemize -% lists or footnote symbols. +% lists or footnote symbols). % % We go the roundabout way via separate OMS declarations so that %\begin{verbatim} @@ -1481,20 +1522,22 @@ % % % -% % \section{The \texttt{textcomp} package} % % +% For any rollback request before 2018-08-11 we make an attempt by +% loading the 2018 version. +% \changes{v2.1b}{2024/04/24} +% {Load the 2018 version when rolling back prior to 2018-08-11 +% (gh/1333)} % \begin{macrocode} %<*TS1sty> -\providecommand\DeclareRelease[3]{} -\providecommand\DeclareCurrentRelease[2]{} - +\DeclareRelease{}{1997-12-01}{textcomp-2018-08-11.sty} \DeclareRelease{}{2018-08-11}{textcomp-2018-08-11.sty} \DeclareCurrentRelease{}{2020-02-02} \ProvidesPackage{textcomp} - [2020/02/02 v2.0n Standard LaTeX package] + [2024/04/24 v2.1b Standard LaTeX package] % \end{macrocode} % % A precaution in case this is used without rebuilding the format. @@ -1550,8 +1593,8 @@ } % \end{macrocode} % +% \changes{v2.1a}{2024/04/22}{Drop default option \texttt{info} (gh/1333)} % \begin{macrocode} -\ExecuteOptions{info} \ProcessOptions\relax % \end{macrocode} % @@ -1706,7 +1749,7 @@ % The default is ``almostfull'' which means that old documents will % work except that |\textcircled| and |\t| will use the kernel % defaults (with the advantage that this also works if the current -% font (as often the case) doesn't implement these glyphs. +% font, as often the case, doesn't implement these glyphs). % % The ``force'' option simply sets the switch to true. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -2301,8 +2344,547 @@ % \begin{macrocode} %</TS1oldsty> % \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% +% \section{The \texttt{checkencodingsubset.tex} file} +% +% This is a simple file that asks for a name of a font family and +% then displays information about the TS1 encoding for this family +% and recommends the right encoding subset (to be used with +% \cs{DeclareEncodingsubset}) for this family. +% \changes{v1.1a}{2024/01/27}{Added check file for encoding subset} +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*TS1check> +\Providesfile{checkencodingsubset.tex} + [2024/01/27 v0.5a Figure out safe TS1 encoding subsets] +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\typeoutdetails\typeout +%\def\typeoutdetails#1{} % alternative definition used below +% \end{macrocode} +% +% For the purpose of this check a glyph exists if the font slot is +% occupied---too bad if that contains the wrong glyph or some tofu. +% If it ``exists'' we return 0 otherwise 1. This way we can call +% this macro several times in a row and obtain a number that is 0 +% if all glyphs are existing or greater than 0 if any of them is +% missing. +% +% The second argument (holding the command name for a symbol) is +% not used during these tests. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\doesglyphexist#1#2{\iffontchar\testFont #1 0\else 1\relax \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% This macro also tests and outputs some information about the +% symbol if it is missing. This time we make use of the second +% argument. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\glyphmissingdetails#1#2{\iffontchar\testFont #1 \else + \typeoutdetails{\space\space\space ==> \string#2 (#1) is missing}\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifsafesubencodingfound +\newif\ifcoremisses +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Testing a group of symbols that belong to one sub-encoding. More +% precisely, the symbols that become unavailable if you change from +% sub-encoding $x$ (\texttt{\#2}) to $x+1$ (\texttt{\#3}). As far +% as the code is concerned, the +% symbols that are supposed to be always available (the core) +% become available if we test the group \texttt{-1} and \texttt{0}. +% +% The first argument contains the testing code and is supposed to +% return a single number greater or equal to zero. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\testgroup#1#2#3{% + \ifnum 0 = #1% + \ifnum #2<0 + \typeoutdetails{All glyphs in core exist}% + \else + \typeoutdetails{All glyphs between sub-encoding #2 and #3 exist}% + \fi + \else + \ifnum #2<0 + \typeoutdetails{**********************************}% + \typeoutdetails{Some glyphs are missing from core:}% + \coremissestrue + \ifsafesubencodingfound \else + \def\subencodingresult{#2}% + \fi + \else + \typeoutdetails{Some glyphs are missing from sub-encoding #2:}% + \ifsafesubencodingfound \else + \def\subencodingresult{#3}% + \fi + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% If some glyphs are missing, we rerun the test code but this time +% using \cs{glyphmissingdetails}. +% \begin{macrocode} + {\let\doesglyphexist \glyphmissingdetails #1}% +% \end{macrocode} +% And because we had misses we have definitely found the subset. +% \begin{macrocode} + \safesubencodingfoundtrue + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The currently defined subset for the family is either stored in +% \cs{TS1:\meta{family}} if it was declared, or it is the default +% subset which is stored in \cs{TS1:?}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\currsubencoding#1{\csname TS1:\ifcsname TS1:#1\endcsname #1\else ?\fi\endcsname} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% If a font family is not found when declaring it with +% \cs{DeclareFixedFont} we end up with the following font. This can +% then be used as a simple test if we failed loading the TS1 font. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareFixedFont\cmrFont{TS1}{cmr}{m}{n}{10pt} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Check for all glyphs in all encoding subsets \ldots +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\testallgroups#1{% + \DeclareFixedFont\testFont{TS1}{#1}{m}{n}{10pt}% + \ifx\testFont\cmrFont + \typeout{***** Font family #1 not found ****}% + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% We haven't checked anything yet. +% \begin{macrocode} + \safesubencodingfoundfalse + \coremissesfalse + \typeoutdetails{^^J-----------------------------------------}% + \typeoutdetails{Testing font family #1^^J(currently TS1-sub-encoding + \currsubencoding{#1})}% + \typeout{-----------------------------------------}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Then we start testing the groups beginning with the glyphs +% between sub-encoding 8 and 9. If any of them is missing (checked +% with \cs{doesglyphexist}) then we already know that 9 is the +% correct answer. +% \begin{macrocode} + \testgroup{% + \doesglyphexist{21}{\texttwelveudash}% + \doesglyphexist{22}{\textthreequartersemdash}% + \doesglyphexist{134}{\textbardbl}% + \doesglyphexist{137}{\textcelsius}% + \doesglyphexist{178}{\texttwosuperior}% + \doesglyphexist{179}{\textthreesuperior}% + \doesglyphexist{185}{\textonesuperior}% + }{8}{9}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Nevertheless we go on with further groups so that the output +% lists all missing glyphs. +% \begin{macrocode} + \testgroup{% + \doesglyphexist{32}{\textblank}% + \doesglyphexist{148}{\textinterrobang}% + \doesglyphexist{149}{\textinterrobangdown}% + \doesglyphexist{191}{\texteuro}% + }{7}{8}% + \testgroup{% + \doesglyphexist{47}{\textfractionsolidus}% + \doesglyphexist{61}{\textminus}% + \doesglyphexist{87}{\textohm}% + \doesglyphexist{181}{\textmu}% + }{6}{7}% + \testgroup{% + \doesglyphexist{140}{\textflorin}% + \doesglyphexist{164}{\textcurrency}% + }{5}{6}% + \testgroup{% + \doesglyphexist{155}{\textnumero}% + \doesglyphexist{157}{\textestimated}% + }{4}{5}% + \testgroup{% + \doesglyphexist{24}{\textleftarrow}% + \doesglyphexist{25}{\textrightarrow}% + \doesglyphexist{94}{\textuparrow}% + \doesglyphexist{95}{\textdownarrow}% + \doesglyphexist{141}{\textcolonmonetary}% + \doesglyphexist{142}{\textwon}% + \doesglyphexist{146}{\textlira}% + \doesglyphexist{150}{\textdong}% + }{3}{4}% + \testgroup{% + \doesglyphexist{60}{\textlangle}% + \doesglyphexist{62}{\textrangle}% + }{2}{3}% + \testgroup{% + \doesglyphexist{0}{\capitalgrave}% + \doesglyphexist{1}{\capitalacute}% + \doesglyphexist{2}{\capitalcircumflex}% + \doesglyphexist{3}{\capitaltilde}% + \doesglyphexist{4}{\capitaldieresis}% + \doesglyphexist{5}{\capitalhungarumlaut}% + \doesglyphexist{6}{\capitalring}% + \doesglyphexist{7}{\capitalcaron}% + \doesglyphexist{8}{\capitalbreve}% + \doesglyphexist{9}{\capitalmacron}% + \doesglyphexist{10}{\capitaldotaccent}% + \doesglyphexist{11}{\capitalcedilla}% + \doesglyphexist{12}{\capitalogonek}% + \doesglyphexist{26}{\t}% + \doesglyphexist{27}{\capitaltie}% + \doesglyphexist{28}{\newtie}% + \doesglyphexist{29}{\capitalnewtie}% + \doesglyphexist{45}{\textdblhyphen}% + \doesglyphexist{48}{\textzerooldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{49}{\textoneoldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{50}{\texttwooldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{51}{\textthreeoldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{52}{\textfouroldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{53}{\textfiveoldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{54}{\textsixoldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{55}{\textsevenoldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{56}{\texteightoldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{57}{\textnineoldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{77}{\textmho}% + \doesglyphexist{79}{\textbigcircle}% + \doesglyphexist{91}{\textlbrackdbl}% + \doesglyphexist{93}{\textrbrackdbl}% + \doesglyphexist{96}{\textasciigrave}% + \doesglyphexist{98}{\textborn}% + \doesglyphexist{99}{\textdivorced}% + \doesglyphexist{100}{\textdied}% + \doesglyphexist{108}{\textleaf}% + \doesglyphexist{109}{\textmarried}% + \doesglyphexist{110}{\textmusicalnote}% + \doesglyphexist{126}{\texttildelow}% + \doesglyphexist{127}{\textdblhyphenchar}% + \doesglyphexist{128}{\textasciibreve}% + \doesglyphexist{129}{\textasciicaron}% + \doesglyphexist{175}{\textasciimacron}% + \doesglyphexist{130}{\textacutedbl}% + \doesglyphexist{131}{\textgravedbl}% + \doesglyphexist{138}{\textdollaroldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{139}{\textcentoldstyle}% + \doesglyphexist{143}{\textnaira}% + \doesglyphexist{144}{\textguarani}% + \doesglyphexist{145}{\textpeso}% + \doesglyphexist{147}{\textrecipe}% + \doesglyphexist{152}{\textpertenthousand}% + \doesglyphexist{153}{\textpilcrow}% + \doesglyphexist{154}{\textbaht}% + \doesglyphexist{156}{\textdiscount}% + \doesglyphexist{158}{\textopenbullet}% + \doesglyphexist{159}{\textservicemark}% + \doesglyphexist{160}{\textlquill}% + \doesglyphexist{161}{\textrquill}% + \doesglyphexist{168}{\textasciidieresis}% + \doesglyphexist{171}{\textcopyleft}% + \doesglyphexist{173}{\textcircledP}% + \doesglyphexist{180}{\textasciiacute}% + \doesglyphexist{184}{\textreferencemark}% + \doesglyphexist{187}{\textsurd}% + }{1}{2}% +% \end{macrocode} +% All fonts (up to now) that belong to sub-encoding 1 do have the +% \cs{textcircled} glyph, but it is too small to be usable. So this +% test for this group currently doesn't do much good---but who +% knows maybe one day a font shows up in which this glyph is +% actually missing. +% \begin{macrocode} + \testgroup{% + \doesglyphexist{79}{\textcircled}% this is not a proper test because the symbol is + % usually available but not usable + }{0}{1}% + \testgroup{% + \doesglyphexist{13}{\textquotestraightbase}% + \doesglyphexist{18}{\textquotestraightdblbase}% + \doesglyphexist{23}{\textcapitalcompwordmark}% + \doesglyphexist{31}{\textascendercompwordmark}% + \doesglyphexist{36}{\textdollar}% + \doesglyphexist{39}{\textquotesingle}% + \doesglyphexist{42}{\textasteriskcentered}% + \doesglyphexist{132}{\textdagger}% + \doesglyphexist{133}{\textdaggerdbl}% + \doesglyphexist{135}{\textperthousand}% + \doesglyphexist{136}{\textbullet}% + \doesglyphexist{151}{\texttrademark}% + \doesglyphexist{162}{\textcent}% + \doesglyphexist{163}{\textsterling}% + \doesglyphexist{165}{\textyen}% + \doesglyphexist{166}{\textbrokenbar}% + \doesglyphexist{167}{\textsection}% + \doesglyphexist{169}{\textcopyright}% + \doesglyphexist{170}{\textordfeminine}% + \doesglyphexist{172}{\textlnot}% + \doesglyphexist{174}{\textregistered}% + \doesglyphexist{176}{\textdegree}% + \doesglyphexist{177}{\textpm}% + \doesglyphexist{182}{\textparagraph}% + \doesglyphexist{183}{\textperiodcentered}% + \doesglyphexist{186}{\textordmasculine}% + \doesglyphexist{188}{\textonequarter}% + \doesglyphexist{189}{\textonehalf}% + \doesglyphexist{190}{\textthreequarters}% + \doesglyphexist{214}{\texttimes}% + \doesglyphexist{246}{\textdiv}% + }{-1}{0}% +% \end{macrocode} +% If all groups have all glyphs then we have the full encoding +% (subset 0). +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifsafesubencodingfound\else + \def\subencodingresult{0}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% If the font is missing some of the core glyphs we make a remark +% about this, because they will never display. +% \begin{macrocode} + \typeoutdetails{-----------------------------------------}% + \typeout{TS1 encoding subset for #1\ifcoremisses \space(ignoring core misses)\fi + \space (\ifnum\subencodingresult = + \currsubencoding{#1} ok\else bad\fi)}% + \typeout{Use sub-encoding \subencodingresult + \ifnum\subencodingresult = \currsubencoding{#1}\else + \space (not \currsubencoding{#1})\fi} + \typeout{-----------------------------------------^^J}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% This tests all declarations (or most of them) that have been +% added to the kernel. It is called if no family is given interactively. +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\testallkerneldefinedfamilies{% +\testallgroups{ccr}% {0} +\testallgroups{cmbr}% {0} +%%\testallgroups{cmr}% {0} % don't test this one as it is the fallback + % thus reports that the family is not found +\testallgroups{cmss}% {0} +\testallgroups{cmtl}% {0} +\testallgroups{cmtt}% {0} +\testallgroups{cmvtt}% {0} +\testallgroups{pxr}% {0} +\testallgroups{pxss}% {0} +\testallgroups{pxtt}% {0} +\testallgroups{qag}% {0} +\testallgroups{qbk}% {0} +\testallgroups{qcr}% {0} +\testallgroups{qcs}% {0} +\testallgroups{qhvc}% {0} +\testallgroups{qhv}% {0} +\testallgroups{qpl}% {0} +\testallgroups{qtm}% {0} +\testallgroups{qzc}% {0} +\testallgroups{txr}% {0} +\testallgroups{txss}% {0} +\testallgroups{txtt}% {0} +% +% Next would claim to be 0 (or 2) +% +%\testallgroups{lmr}% {1} +%\testallgroups{lmdh}% {1} +%\testallgroups{lmss}% {1} +%\testallgroups{lmssq}% {1} +%\testallgroups{lmvtt}% {1} +%\testallgroups{lmtt}% {1} % missing TM, SM and pertenthousand so really 2 +% +% these are no longer in TeX Live +% +%\testallgroups{ptmx}% {2} % gone for a long time it seems +%\testallgroups{ptmj}% {2} % ditto +%\testallgroups{ul8}% {2} % ditto +% +% next block has tofu chars so results are wrong +% +%\testallgroups{bch}% {5} % tofu for blank, ohm +%\testallgroups{futj}%{5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm +%\testallgroups{futs}%{5} % tofu for blank, ohm +%\testallgroups{futx}%{5} % probably (currently broken distrib) +%\testallgroups{pag}% {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm +%\testallgroups{pbk}% {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm +%\testallgroups{pcr}% {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm +%\testallgroups{phv}% {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm +%\testallgroups{pnc}% {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm +%\testallgroups{pplj}%{5} % tofu for blank +%\testallgroups{pplx}%{5} % tofu for blank +%\testallgroups{ppl}% {5} % tofu for blank interrobang/down +%\testallgroups{ptm}% {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm +%\testallgroups{pzc}% {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm +%\testallgroups{ul9}% {5} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm +%\testallgroups{dayroms}%{6} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm +%\testallgroups{dayrom}% {6} % tofu for blank, interrobang/down, ohm +%\testallgroups{augie}%{8} % really only missing euro and full of tofu +%\testallgroups{put}% {8} +%\testallgroups{uag}% {8} % probably (currently broken distrib) +%\testallgroups{ugq}% {8} +% +\testallgroups{zi4}% {9} +% +%% not installed normally +% +%\testallgroups{hls}% {5} +%\testallgroups{hlst}% {5} +%\testallgroups{hlct}% {5} +%\testallgroups{hlh}% {5} +%\testallgroups{hlx}% {8} +%\testallgroups{hlce}% {8} +%\testallgroups{hlcn}% {8} +%\testallgroups{hlcw}% {8} +%\testallgroups{hlcf}% {8} - +\testallgroups{lato-LF}% {0} % with a bunch of tofu inside --- should probably be changed +\testallgroups{opensans-TLF}%{0} % with a bunch of tofu inside --- should probably be changed +\testallgroups{cantarell-TLF}% {0} % with a bunch of tofu inside --- should probably be changed +\testallgroups{fbb-LF}% {0} % missing centoldstyle ---> 2 +\testallgroups{tli}% {1} % with lots of tofu inside --- should probably be changed +\testallgroups{Alegreya-OsF}% {2} +\testallgroups{AlegreyaSans-OsF}% {2} +\testallgroups{DejaVuSans-TLF}% {2} +\testallgroups{DejaVuSansCondensed-TLF}% {2} +\testallgroups{DejaVuSansMono-TLF}% {2} this is missing \textfractionsolidus which makes it 7 really +\testallgroups{EBGaramond-LF}% {2} +\testallgroups{Tempora-TLF}% {2} +\testallgroups{Tempora-TOsF}% {2} +\testallgroups{Arimo-TLF}% {3} +\testallgroups{Crlt-TLF}% {3} changed from Carlito- +\testallgroups{FiraSans-LF}% {3} should be 4 +\testallgroups{IBMPlexSans-TLF}% {3} +\testallgroups{Merriwthr-OsF}% {3} changed from Merriweather- and should be 2 +\testallgroups{Montserrat-LF}% {3} now 2 +\testallgroups{MontserratAlternates-LF}%{3} now 2 +\testallgroups{SourceCodePro-TLF}% {3} +\testallgroups{SourceCodePro-TOsF}% {3} +\testallgroups{SourceSansPro-OsF}% {3} +\testallgroups{SourceSerifPro-LF}% {3} +\testallgroups{Tinos-TLF}% {3} +\testallgroups{AccanthisADFStdNoThree-LF}%{4} +\testallgroups{Cabin-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{Caladea-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{Chivo-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{ClearSans-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{Coelacanth-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{CrimsonPro-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{FiraMono-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{FiraMono-TOsF}% {4} +\testallgroups{Go-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{GoMono-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{InriaSans-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{InriaSerif-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{LibertinusSans-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{LibertinusSerif-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{LibreBodoni-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{LibreFranklin-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{LinguisticsPro-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{LinguisticsPro-OsF}% {4} +\testallgroups{LinuxBiolinumT-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{LinuxLibertineT-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{MerriwthrSans-OsF}% {4} name change and now 2 +\testallgroups{MintSpirit-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{MintSpiritNoTwo-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{PTMono-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{PTSans-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{PTSansCaption-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{PTSansNarrow-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{PTSerif-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{PTSerifCaption-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{Raleway-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{Raleway-TOsF}% {4} +\testallgroups{Roboto-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{RobotoMono-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{RobotoSlab-TLF}% {4} +\testallgroups{Rosario-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{SticksTooText-LF}% {4} +\testallgroups{UniversalisADFStd-LF}%{4} +\testallgroups{Almndr-OsF}% {5} name change +\testallgroups{Baskervaldx-LF}% {5} +\testallgroups{BaskervilleF-LF}% {5} now 2 +\testallgroups{Bttr-TLF}% {5} name changed from Bitter-... +\testallgroups{Cinzel-LF}% {5} +\testallgroups{CinzelDecorative-LF}%{5} +\testallgroups{DejaVuSerif-TLF}% {5} +\testallgroups{DejaVuSerifCondensed-TLF}% {5} +\testallgroups{GilliusADF-LF}% {5} +\testallgroups{charssil-TLF} %% missing should be 5 +\testallgroups{GilliusADFCond-LF}%{5} +\testallgroups{GilliusADFNoTwo-LF}%{5} +\testallgroups{GilliusADFNoTwoCond-LF}%{5} +\testallgroups{Lbstr-LF}% {5} name change and should be 7 +\testallgroups{OldStandard-TLF}% {5} +\testallgroups{PlyfrDisplay-LF}%{5} name change +\testallgroups{PlyfrDisplay-OsF}% {5} name change +\testallgroups{TheanoDidot-TLF}% {5} +\testallgroups{TheanoDidot-TOsF}% {5} +\testallgroups{TheanoModern-TLF}% {5} +\testallgroups{TheanoModern-TOsF}%{5} +\testallgroups{TheanoOldStyle-TLF}%{5} +\testallgroups{TheanoOldStyle-TOsF}%{5} +\testallgroups{Crimson-TLF}% {6} +\testallgroups{IBMPlexMono-TLF}% {6} now 3 +\testallgroups{IBMPlexSerif-TLF}% {6} now 3 +\testallgroups{LibertinusMono-TLF}%{6} should be 8 +\testallgroups{LibertinusSerifDisplay-LF}%{6} +\testallgroups{LinuxLibertineDisplayT-LF}%{6} +\testallgroups{LinuxLibertineMonoT-LF}%{6} +\testallgroups{LinuxLibertineMonoT-TLF}%{6} +\testallgroups{Ovrlck-LF}% {6} name changed +\testallgroups{CormorantGaramond-LF}%{7} +\testallgroups{Heuristica-TLF}% {7} +\testallgroups{Heuristica-TOsF}% {7} +\testallgroups{IMFELLEnglish-TLF}%{7} +\testallgroups{LibreBskvl-LF}% {7} %% wrong name LibreBaskerville-TLF +\testallgroups{LibreCsln-LF}% {7} changed from LibreCaslon- +\testallgroups{Mrcls-LF}% {7} %% wrong name Marcellus-LF +\testallgroups{NotoSans-LF}% {7} +\testallgroups{NotoSansMono-TLF}%{7} now 2 +\testallgroups{NotoSansMono-TOsF}%{7} now 2 +\testallgroups{NotoSerif-LF}% {7} +\testallgroups{Quattro-LF}% {7} changed from Quattrocento- +\testallgroups{QuattroSans-LF}% {7} changed from QuattrocentoSans- +\testallgroups{XCharter-TLF}% {7} now 2 +\testallgroups{XCharter-TOsF}% {7} now 2 +\testallgroups{erewhon-LF}% {7} now 2 +\testallgroups{ComicNeue-TLF}% {7} +\testallgroups{ComicNeueAngular-TLF}%{7} +\testallgroups{Frm-LF}%{7} % the superiors are missing; name changed from Forum-LF +\testallgroups{Cochineal-TLF}% {8} now 5 +\testallgroups{AlgolRevived-TLF}%{9} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% There interaction with the user. +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^J=====================================================================} +\typeout{| Enter font family to check (or <enter> for kernel defined families)} +\typeout{=====================================================================} +\typein[\FontFamilyToCheck]{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\if!\FontFamilyToCheck! + \typeout{=====================================================================} + \typeout{| Detailed output? (default no)} + \typeout{=====================================================================} + \typein[\Details]{} + \if!\Details! + \def\typeoutdetails#1{} + \else + \let\typeoutdetails\typeout + \fi + \testallkerneldefinedfamilies +\else + \let\typeoutdetails\typeout + \testallgroups\FontFamilyToCheck +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\stop +%</TS1check> +% \end{macrocode} +% % \Finale % diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx index 180b8accfe4..c900f519dd5 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ %<*driver> % \fi \ProvidesFile{ltthm.dtx} - [2014/09/29 v1.0f LaTeX Kernel (Theorems)] + [2024/03/18 v1.0g LaTeX Kernel (Theorems)] % \iffalse \documentclass{ltxdoc} \GetFileInfo{ltthm.dtx} @@ -237,16 +237,31 @@ % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\@thm} +% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/04/17}{Use new std counter error message (FMi)} +% \changes{v1.0g}{2024/03/18}{Use \cs{@kernel@refstepcounter} to avoid an unwanted target (UFi)} % \begin{macrocode} +%</2ekernel> +%<*2ekernel|latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2024/03/18}% +%<latexrelease> {\@thm}{no link target}% \def\@thm#1#2{% - \refstepcounter{#1}% + \@kernel@refstepcounter{#1}% \@ifnextchar[{\@ythm{#1}{#2}}{\@xthm{#1}{#2}}} +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}% +%<latexrelease> {\@thm}{no link target}% +%<latexrelease>\def\@thm#1#2{% +%<latexrelease> \refstepcounter{#1}% +%<latexrelease> \@ifnextchar[{\@ythm{#1}{#2}}{\@xthm{#1}{#2}}} +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%</2ekernel|latexrelease> % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\@xthm} % \begin{macro}{\@ythm} % \begin{macrocode} +%<*2ekernel> \def\@xthm#1#2{% \@begintheorem{#2}{\csname the#1\endcsname}\ignorespaces} \def\@ythm#1#2[#3]{% @@ -273,11 +288,26 @@ % NFSS} % Providing theorem defaults. % \task{???}{add `reset@font?} +% % \changes{v1.0g}{2024/03/18}{Insert link target in the label (UFi)} % \begin{macrocode} +%</2ekernel> +%<*2ekernel|latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2024/03/18}% +%<latexrelease> {\@begintheorem}{add link targets}% \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\trivlist - \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2}]\itshape} + \item[\MakeLinkTarget{\@currentcounter}\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2}]\itshape} \def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist - \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2\ (#3)}]\itshape} + \item[\MakeLinkTarget{\@currentcounter}\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2\ (#3)}]\itshape} +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}% +%<latexrelease> {\@begintheorem}{add link targets}% +%<latexrelease>\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\trivlist +%<latexrelease> \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2}]\itshape} +%<latexrelease>\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist +%<latexrelease> \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2\ (#3)}]\itshape} +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%</2ekernel|latexrelease> +%<*2ekernel> \def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist} %</2ekernel> % \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx index bf5dce4ca18..5031ef83073 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx @@ -112,10 +112,10 @@ %</2ekernel> %<latexrelease>\edef\latexreleaseversion %<*2ekernel|latexrelease> - {2023-11-01} + {2024-06-01} %</2ekernel|latexrelease> %<*2ekernel> -\def\patch@level{1} +\def\patch@level{0} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{\development@branch@name} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx index 584f4f51f64..5e8b4946926 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ % %<class>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} %<class>\ProvidesClass{ltxdoc} -%<class> [2023/03/28 v2.1j Standard LaTeX documentation class] +%<class> [2024/02/08 v2.1j Standard LaTeX documentation class] % %<*driver> \documentclass{ltxdoc} @@ -288,12 +288,13 @@ % \section{Useful abbreviations} % % |\cmd{\foo}| Prints |\foo| verbatim. It may be used inside moving -% arguments. It can \emph{not} be use to record commands that are defined as +% arguments. It can \emph{not} be used to record commands that are defined as % ``|\outer|'' nor is it possible to use it on conditionals such as % |\iftrue| or defined by |\newif|. -% |\cs{foo}| already available with the \texttt{doc} package also prints |\foo|, for those who prefer that +% |\cs{foo}| Already available with the \texttt{doc} package and also prints |\foo|, +% for those who prefer that % syntax. (This second form can be used to record all types of command so the -% above restrictions do not apply. +% above restrictions do not apply.) % \begin{macro}{\cmd} % \changes{v2.0k}{1994/05/21}{New definition, so \cmd\{ works.} % \begin{macro}{\cs} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx index ae91abf671c..0464053c10f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ % extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. % % \fi -\def\nfssfontfileversion{v2.2e} -\def\nfssfontfiledate{2020/11/26} +\def\nfssfontfileversion{v2.2f} +\def\nfssfontfiledate{2023/11/07} % % \iffalse @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ {\PackageWarningNoLine{nfssfont}% {Encoding file `\next' not found.% \MessageBreak - You might have misspelt the name of the encoding + You might have misspelled the name of the encoding \MessageBreak or perhaps this encoding is not a text encoding, \MessageBreak diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd index 8ddd639d50a..b35cd07a8be 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ %<*driver, > \ProvidesFile{sfonts.drv} %</driver, > - [2019/07/09 v2.2f Standard LaTeX slide font definitions] + [2023/12/02 v2.2f Standard LaTeX slide font definitions] % %<*driver> \documentclass{ltxdoc} @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ % \section{Introduction} % % This file contains the external font information for special -% variants of the the Computer Modern fonts to be used for overhead +% variants of the Computer Modern fonts to be used for overhead % slides. They allow to produce slides in a similar fashion as it was % originally done by \SliTeX{}. % @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ % format. Instead the standard format may be used and internally only % different font definition files come into play. % -% Note, that that you therefore can easily produce slides in different +% Note that you therefore can easily produce slides in different % fonts just by calling an appropriate package (like |times|) in % your |\usepackage| command. This works, for example, with all % fonts that are defined to be scalable (eg PostScript fonts) since diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx index 9d3baaa0245..9844585fa56 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ \ProvidesFile{syntonly.dtx} %</dtx> %<*package|dtx> - [2017/06/30 v2.1e Standard LaTeX2e package] + [2024/02/08 v2.1e Standard LaTeX2e package] %</package|dtx> % \end{macrocode} % @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ \repeat % \end{macrocode} % Since all font changes occur either via |\selectfont| (in -% text or |\mathversion| (for math mode) it is sufficient +% text) or |\mathversion| (for math mode), it is sufficient % to change these to no-ops. In addition we must prevent % the loading of math fonts, this is done by making % |\getanddefine@fonts| a no-op. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ % The |\nopages@| macro disables the \LaTeX{} output routine. % To this end we define a very simple output routine that empties % the output \emph{and} footnote boxes (remember that the latter -% are insertions. +% are insertions). % \begin{macrocode} \def\nopages@{% \output {\setbox\z@\box\@cclv diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx index b7dfe4b0c0b..a2701ac5c87 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx @@ -886,7 +886,8 @@ \else % \end{macrocode} % -% If the input is malformed UTF-8 there may not be enough closing ) so +% If the input is malformed UTF-8 there may not be enough closing +% \iffalse(\fi ) so % add 5 so there are always some remaining then cleanup and remove % any remaining ones at the end. This avoids |\numexpr| parse errors % while outputting a package error. @@ -1660,7 +1661,7 @@ % \end{macrocode} % According to the Unicode standard Ux04C5 should be an L with ``tail'' not % with descender (which also exists as Ux04A2) but it looks as if the char -% names do not make this distinction). Should they? +% names do not make this distinction. Should they? % \begin{macrocode} %<all,x2,t2c,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04C5}{\CYRLDSC} %<all,x2,t2c,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04C6}{\cyrldsc} |